最新消息: USBMI致力于为网友们分享Windows、安卓、IOS等主流手机系统相关的资讯以及评测、同时提供相关教程、应用、软件下载等服务。

IBM 5100 维护信息手册说明书

IT圈 admin 17浏览 0评论

2024年11月6日发(作者:欧阳高)

DCP1 NORMAL MODE

DCP1 normal mode can be entered during a customer

job

in order to display and alter data. Control of the

5100 can then be returned

to the customer program and

execution

of the job can continue.

You can return

to the customer job after displaying or

altering data, or you can continue from normal mode

to

diagnostic mode. Once the DCP1 diagnostic mode is

initiated on the keyboard, you cannot return

to the

customer job. You can, however, choose

to go from the

DCP1 diagnostic mode to DCP2 or do a RESTART.

To load the

DCP1 normal mode:

1. Press the HOLD key.

2. Press and hold the CMD key and press the -

(minus) key on the numeric keyboard.

To exit' from the DCP1 normal mode:

1. Press and hold the CMD key; then press the

+

(plus) key on the numeric keyboard.

When

DCP1 is loaded, the top eight lines on the display

are cleared, and the header

DCP1 is placed in the

middle

of both halves of the top line. The header is

repeated

in both halves of the display; it will appear

even

if the L32-64-R32 switch is set to display a

32.,.character line. The cursor flashes (or blinks)

whenever the keyboard is operational.

[

Depl

DCPl

)

'When the DCP1 normal mode is exited, the only change in

the display is the repositioning

of the cursor to the bottom of

the display screen.

3-18

/

Display

(

Display is a DCP1 normal mode function. To use this

function, you must load

DCP and then press the D key

and enter the starting address

of the location of the

read/write storage that you want to display.

The display

now shows 32 sequential locations of

read/write storage starting with the input address.

Scroll up

(t)

displays the next 16 bytes, and scroll down

(+)

displays the previous 16 bytes. The SPACE bar

returns control

to DCP1. To exit from DCP1 press and

hold the CMD key; then press the

+

(plus) key on the

numeric keyboard.

To display storage locations using a different starting

address, enter D and the new starting address.

Entry Format

(

Example:

nCPl

D 0120

ADDR

DCPl.

0120

0130

0000

OB56

0l.B2

OOl8

019C

OOIA

OOlD

0272

OlAO

0276

OIAl.

027A

0000

027E

0000

0282

Valid Input Keys

Valid

Input Keys

Calls the display function to

display read/write storage.

Scrolls forward; displays the

next 32 bytes.

Scrolls backward; displays the

previous 32 bytes.

SPACE bar

Cancels the requested fUnctidn.

To turn

off the PROCESS CHECK

light,

press the RESTART key.

Calls the DCP1 diagnostic mode.

D

t

CMD and

*

or

x (multiply on

the numeric

keyboard)

CMD and

+

(plus on the

numeric

keyboard)

0-9, A-F

Enters hex characters.

Returns to the customer program

if the DCP1 diagnostic mode has

not been called.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-19

Alter

Alter is a

DCP1 normal mode function. In order to use

this function, you

must first load DCP1 by holding the

CMD key and pressing the HOLD key; then hold the

CMD key and press the -(minus) key. To select the

alter function, press

A; then enter the starting address

of the location of the read/write storage you want to

alter.

After you enter a starting address, the existing contents

of 32 bytes of read/write storage are displayed on two

lines of 16 bytes each. New data can be entered on the

top line only. The display is altered with each keystroke.

Entry Format

New data is entered into read/write storage in two

ways:

• Press the EXECUTE key.

• Enter the 16th byte.

In both cases, the

top line is read/write

storage and the display is advanced one line to atlow

additional entries. This option allows you

to enter a

program that ed immediately. Pressing the

SPACE bar terminates the alter function and returns

control

to DCP1. To exit from DCP1, hold the CMD key

and press the

+

(plus) key on the numeric keyboard.

A

xxxx

Example:

DCP1

A '+000

'+000

'+010

DCP1

/

ADDR

".

j

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

Valid Input Keys

Valid

Input Keys

A Calls the alter function to alter read/

write storage.

Scrolls forward and displays the next

16 bytes.

Scrolls backward

and displays the

previous 16 bytes.

EXECUTE

Enters the altered hex data into

read/write storage.

Cancels the requested function.

./

t

SPACE bar

CMD

and

*

or

x (multiply on

the numeric

keyboard)

CMD

and

+

(plus on the

numeric

keyboard)

Calls the DCP1 diagnostic mode.

0-9, A-F

-+

Enters hex characters.

Spaces forward.

Backspaces.

Returns to the customer program if

the

DCP1 diagnostic mode has not

been called.

+-

3-20.

(

(-

.

(/

DCP1 DIAGNOSTIC MODE

To enter DCP1 diagnostic mode, first call in the DCP1

program. Entry into diagnostic mode is made through

the keyboard by

pressing and holding the CMD key and

pressing the

*

(asterisk) or x (multiply) key on the numeric

keyboard. Entering

these keys out of sequence cancels the

requested function.

All address specifications for the various diagnostic

functions are forced

to an even halfword boundary.

Recovery from

an error is accomplished by starting the

routine over again. Recovery from a process check is

accomplished by pressing RESTART. Exit from

DCP1

diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART.

DCP1 Diagnostic Mode Functions

Branch:

This function is used in the tape read tests

and, at times, when receiving plant assistance. Branch

exits

DCP1 diagnostic mode to execute code located in

executable ROS or in read/write storage.

When exiting from the diagnostic mode, the keyboard is

activated

to accept the CMD and ATTN combination.

This key combination cancels any operation and returns

control

to DCP1 diagnostic mode (unless the branch

was

to another keyboard control routine). Therefore,

when branching

to tape read or DCP2, any of the

branch operations can be cancelled.

The

BH (branch and halt) halts processing when the halt

address is reached in the instruction address register of

level 0; a shift and ATTN key combination restores the

microinstruction at the halted address and forces level 0

to a halt.

At this time, the 5100 Portable Computer should be

placed in step mode. Pressing ATTN again resumes

processing

in level 0 following completion of the step

mode in level 3. The space bar returns control

to DCP1

diagnostic mode.

Valid Branch Input Keys

BE Branch to executable ROS address.

BH Branch to read/write storage address and

halt at the specified address.

BR

Branch to read/write storage address with

no halt.

EXECUTE Execute the preceding branch instruction

and exit from the branch routine but re-

main in DCP1 diagnostic mode.

DCP1 normal mode keys are also valid in DCP1 diagnostic

mode.

Branch Display Formats

Branch in executable

ROS with no halt:

BE ROS@

xxxx

EXEC -

Branch in read/write storage with no halt:

BR MEM@

xxxx

EXEC -

Branch in read/write storage with halt:

BH MEM@

xxxx

HALT@

yyyy

EXEC -

xxxx

=

Branch address in hex.

yyyy

=

Halt address in hex.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-21

Call:

This function allows you to load the tape read test

into read/write storage for execution, and allows you to

execute the op code, read/write storage, and ROS test

routines from executable

ROS. Call also provides tape

copy

and storage dump functions.

Once DCP1 diagnostic mode is entered, use the following

keying

sequence to use the call function:

1.

Press C.

2. Hold the CMD key and press a numeric key to load

the call routines.

Use the numeric keyboard for

entering digits 0-9.

3. Press EXECUTE.

Each call routine is identified by a digit (0·9) preceded by

CMD.

The following list

shows the format for all routines and

their names:

Routine Name

CMDO Tape Read Test

CMD 1

Tape Read Test

CMD2

OP Code Loop Test

CMD3

ROS Read CRC Loop Test

CMD4 ROS Address Loop Test

CMD5

Read/Write Storage Test

CMD6

Not Assigned

CMD 7

Not Assigned

CMD8

Tape to Storage Dump

CMD 9

Storage Dump

to Tape

3·22

Tape Read Tests -CMD 0 and CMD 1

CMDO

C TAPE TEST

EXEC -

This routine tests the read function on the tape unit. It

performs the same tests as the CMD 1 routine except

the forward motion and reverse motion test. Therefore,

this test provides a faster access

to the DCP2 program.

Return

to DCP1 diagnostic mode by holding CMD and

pressing ATTN. Exit DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing

RESTART.

CMD 1

C TAPE DrAG

EXEC -

This routine tests the read function on the tape unit. It

also tests the forward and reverse motion. This test

provides access

to the DCP2 program. Return to DCP1

diagnostic mode by holding CMD and pressing ATTN.

Exit from

DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART.

/

Loading

(

CAUTION

Do not insert the CE diagnostic cartridge until instructed

to do so on the display. The tape might be erased if

inserted too soon.

Refer

to

DCP

1 Diagnostic Mode in this section.

Hold CMD and press HOLD

(

Hold CMD and press -(minus) on the numeric

keyboard

Hold CMD and press • or x (multiply) on the numeric

keyboard

Press C

Hold CMD and press 1 on the numeric keyboard

Press

EXECUTE

You can return to DCP1 diagnostic mode from the tape

read test by holding CMD and pressing ATTN.

The tape read test is called into

read/write storage

when CMD 1 is entered. Pressing

EXECUTE starts the

test.

Some of the tests in the tape read test require answers

to questions put on the display. Follow the instructions

given and answer the questions carefully. The following

message is also displayed during some

of the tests:

PRESS EXECUTE, R, OR L

EXECUTE

=

go to next test

R

=

retry this test

L

=

loop on this test

Do NOT press EXECUTE,

R, or L until directed to do so

by the instructions.

The characters DCP2 MENU appear on the display when

the tape read test is finished.

The program can be rerun by

preSSing ATTN, entering

BR 2Boo, and pressing EXECUTE. However, once

another program is selected from the DCP2 menu, the

tape read test cannot be run unless

it is recalled from

nonexecutable ROS via DCP1.

Retry

Test

Pressing R retries the present test once.

If an error

exists after pressing

R, the following error message

appears on the display screen:

ERROR

XXX E 80 GOTO MAP 0300

Loop

On Test

If an error occurs, pressing L causes the program to

loop on the present test. After pressing L, a F (fail) or a

P (pass)

is displayed on the bottom right side of the

display screen. The F indicates that

an error exists and

. the P indicates that

an error does not exist.

To stop looping, hold CMD and press ATTN. This stops

the tape read test.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-23

Rerun Test

To run the tape read test again (since it is still in

read/write storage), do the following:

Remove the CE diagnostic cartridge

Enter

BR (branch to read/write storage)

Enter

2BOO (starting address of the tape read test)

Press

EXECUTE

Follow the instructions on the display (some loops

will not have instructions)

The

CE diagnostic cartridge must be removed before

retrying the tape read· test.

Loop

On

Error Code

A specific test within the tape read tests can be looped

I

by holding CMD, pressing ATTN, and altering location

280C

to the error number of the test (allows you to loop

on a specific test any time). Looping in this manner is

the same

as pressing L when the instruction press

EXECUT1:, R, or L is displayed.

Refer

to the tape read test and auxiliary tape MDI

routines in this section

for error numbers.

3-24

For example, to loop on error 0912:

Hold CMD and press ATTN

Remove the

CE diagnostic cartridge

Alter location

2BOC to the error number as. follows:

Press A

Enter

2BOC

Enter 0912

Press the space bar

Enter

BR 2800 (starting address of tape read

tests)

Press

EXECUTE

The tape read test will execute normally until the

test you selected is reached.

Follow the instructions on the display. Tests run prior

to

the first display will loop without displaying instructions.

Display messages:

F (fail) -error

,/

P (pass) -no error

Looping stops when you hold CMD and press ATTN.

Op Code Loop Test -CMD 2 ROS Address Loop Test -CMD 4

(

(

C OP CODE

EXEC -

This routine tests all controller microinstructions.

Numerous IAR (instruction address register) hang points

localize specific failing processor operations and monitor

C ROS ADR

EXEC -

This test sends nonexecutable ROS addresses to the

ROS adapter, reads back several halfwords of data, and

then reads back the address to verify that it advances

storage accesses at the

RDR for improper parity.

f

This test repeats until halted by the operator (if

accessed via DCP1). When accessed by the bring up

program,

it is not repeated.

ROS Read CRC Loop Test -CMD 3

C ROS READ

EXEC -

The ROS test checks if the machine can address and

fetch data from each

ROS module relating to the

language (APL or BASIC)

of the machine. While the test

runs, each byte

of data in each ROS module is read and

CRC sums are generated and compared. Compare

failures, end the test, and post

an error on the display.

Parity errors from the

ROS adapter are detected on the

bus

in to the control unit and cause a process check.

Before executing this routine, the

read/write storage

must be set

to zero at locations 0100 through 010D.

Refer

to the DCP1 alter function for the procedure. Exit

from

DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART.

(

correctly. Send and read back continues until 12

different

ROS addresses are used for the selected

language (BASIC

or APL). This test loops until halted by

the operator (if called via DCP1). When called by the

bring up program,

it does not loop.

Read/Write Storage Test -CMD 5

C RAM TEST

EXEC -

This routine stores data in all locations of read/write

storage and then reads it all out and compares it one

address at a time.

It then shifts the data one position

and loops on the test.

If allowed to run, all read/write

storage addresses are tested for each possible data

combination. The

test runs until the operator stops it by

using the

CMD and ATTN key combination. Either a

process check or a customer halt condition can occur.

RFLO (register F in level 0) (refer to

Display Registers

in

this section) contains the storage location that was

being addressed at the time

of the failure. The

suspected

read/write storage card that caused the

failure

can be identified by using the following table:

0000

to 3FFF K2, K4 (read/write storage) cards

4000

to 7FFF L2, L4 (read/write storage) cards

8000

to BFFF M2, M4 (read/write storage) cards

COOO to FFFF N2, N4 (read/write storage) cards

The

read/write storage cards K2, L2, M2, and N2 are

the even addresses and card

K4, L4, M4, and N4 are

the odd addresses. Exit from

DCP1 diagnostic mode by

pressing RESTART.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3·25

Tape to Storage Dump -CMD 8

C LOAD MEM@

FILE#

SELT

EXEC -

This routine can be used to load DCP2 directly from

tape

or to copy individual files.

• To load DCP2:

1. Load DCP1 -diagnostic mode.

2. Insert the CE diagnostic cartridge.

3. Enter C CMD

S.

4. Enter the read/write storage location, MEM@

OSOO.

5. Enter the tape file number, FILE# 0001 (number

in hex).

6. Enter storage selection, SEL T 0000.

7. Press

EXECUTE.

S.

Enter BR

OSOO.

9. Press EXECUTE to run DCP2.

• To copy individual files or

to load a file into storage:

1. Press and hold the CMD key.

2. Press the -(minus) key.

3. Press and hold the CMD key.

4. Press the x

or

*

(multiply) key.

5. Press the C key.

6. Press and hold the CMD key.

7. Press the S key.

S. Enter the read/write storage location, MEM@

OSOO.·

9. Enter the tape file number, FILE# xxxx (number

in hex).

10. Enter the storage selection, SEL T 0000.

11. Press the EXECUTE key.

The file number specified in step 9 is

now loaded in

memory starting at position

OSOO.

See

Storage Dump

to

Tape -CMD

9 in this section to load this file onto

another tape.

3-26

Storage Dump to Tape -CMD 9

C DUMP MEM@ _

END@ -

F I LE#-

TYPE-

SELT

EXEC -

This routine dumps storage from

M~M@

to END@

onto the tape cartridge, FILE# (hex),

if the TYPE is

identified. There are two types of files that can be

dumped:

Type 0011 is the tape copy function that labels the

tape file header on the tape you are copying to. This

is the same header found on t!le tape you are

copying from.

Type

OO4S is the. storage dump function that labels

the tape file header on the tape you are writing.

SEL T is the storage selection number. The SEL T for

read/write storage is 0000. The SELT for APL ROS is

0004. The SEL T for BASIC ROS is

OOOS.

The tape

receiving the dump must be marked properly.

This procedure should be used

to obtain a read/write

storage dump when submitting an MTR (microcode

trouble report), or

if you cannot obtain a storage dump

with the CMD 9 function.

The data is written in the first unused file. The file type

created is 72, which is the MTR file type.

To dump all

of the data in read/write storage to tape:

1. Insert a tape that is initialized and marked for a file

large enough

to contain the data (must be a

minimum of 16K). The tape dump program looks

for the first unused file of 16K or more.

2.

Hold CMD and press HOLD.

3.

Hold CMD and

press/

-+

(divide) key on the

numeric keyboard.

4. Displays DCP1 diagnostic mode when the

operation is complete. Press RESTART

to initialize

the 5100 Portable Computer and continue.

Tape Copy Procedure

CAUTION

You can use this procedure to copy individual files,

except 8, 9, and 15, from the CE diagnostic cartridge. If

files 8, 9, and 15 are copied, MDls 860 and 891 tests

(average velocity and peak shift head azimuth) might be

inaccurate.

To copy individual files from storage to tape, use the

following procedure:

1. The file to be copied from storage must have been

previously loaded using the CMD 8 function; or

it

must already be in the storage locations you

specify.

Press and hold the CMD

k~y.

If you are already in DCP1 diagnostic mode, go to

step 7.

Press the -(minus) key.

Press and hold the CMD key.

Press the x or

*

(multiply) key.

Press the C key.

Press and hold the CMD key.

Press the 9 key.

Enter the starting

read/write storage location,

MEM@0800.

Enter the ending read/write storage location,

END@

FFFF.

Enter the file number, FILE# xxxx (number in hex).

Enter the file type (0011

if copying from another

tape or 0048

if dumping from storage to a tape).

T 0000.

Enter the storage selection,

SEL

Press the EXECUTE key.

2.

3.

To copy

an entire tape, use the tape copy program on

the customer support cartridge. The tape copy program

is called via the PATCH program using )PATCH (APL) or

PATCH (BASIC). .

To repair individual files on a

CE diagnostic tape, use

the following procedures:

1. Use the C CMD 8 function to store the desired file

in

read/write storage at location 0800.

Insert the tape cartridge to be repaired.

Enter C CMD 9.

Enter the beginning storage location (0800) and

the end storage location

(FFFF).

Note: Error E80 010 is a normal ending error.

12.

5. Enter the tape file number in hex that was loaded

from the good tape

(0001 -001 F), and the file type

number (0011

J.

Enter the storage selection (0000).

Press EXECUTE. The sequence of C CM D 8 and

C CMD 9

can be repeated for each of the files on

the

CE diagnostic cartridge.

Return to DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing

ATTN.

Exit from

DCP1 diagnostic mode, after copying the

tape, by pressing RESTART.

Insert the repaired tape cartridge and verify that it

is fixed.

13.

(

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

2.

3.

It

4.

11.

6.

14.

15.

7.

(

8.

9.

(

10.

The file that was

in the storage positions specified in

steps 10 and 11 has now been loaded on the tape in

the file number specified in step 12. This procedure, in

conjunction

with CMD 8 function, allows you to load

files into storage

from one tape and then dump them

onto another tape.

It is also useful in checking

suspected files that may contain CRe errors. By loading

the file into storage (using CMD 8), the CRC and data is

verified

for parity.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-27

To tape errors while using the customer support

cartridge that is prior

to ECS32655, use this patch to

halt the machine and display the status while running

the tape copy functions:

1.

Load the customer support cartridge.

2.

Begin the tape copy.

3.

Press the HOLD key.

4. When the machine halts, alter

OFOA to 0000.

5. Hold the CMD key down and press the

+

(plus)

key

to continue to tape copy.

6. When

an error occurs, the system will hang.

7. Display 2542-Look for current device address

(E20, E40, or ESO).

S. Display 254E-Error code (return code internal

format).

9. Display 255E-Error code (return code internal

format).

For example: Error code 1 B1 D

=

tape cmd error 002.

Refer

to the Tape

IOCB

and the 5100

Internal

Code

Chart

in section 6 of this manual.

TAPE RESIDENT PROGRAMS

This third group of diagnostic programs in the IBM 5100

Portable Computer maintenance package is

for

diagnosing I/O problems other than reading failures by

the tape unit.

If the bring up program finished without error and the

DCP1 tape read program also ran correctly, the problem

on the 5100 is probably an I/O problem. Of course, the

I/O might not be at fault if the problem is intermittent.

If an intermittent failure is suspected, DCP1 can be used

to loop on the bring up program or to rerun the tape

read program.

3·28

There are three ways to determine intermittent I/O

failures in the maintenance procedure.

1. From MAP 200.

2.

From MAP 900.

3.

Directly (in this case, you must be familiar with. the

5100 Portable Computer maintenance package and

be confident that the 5100 has

an I/O problem).

In any case, the part

of the 5100 Portable Computer

causing the failure can be found by following the

procedures in DCP2 along

with the instructions on the

display. DCP2 (the first file on the

CE diagnostic

t

cartridge) is loaded automatically into

read/write storage

at the completion of the tape read program. The various

MAPs and diagnostics integrated (M DI) (the remaining

files on the

CE diagnostic cartridge, part 160S705) are

loaded into

read/write storage by the CE using DCP2.

Diagnostic Control Program 2 (DCP2)

DCP2 controls the loading and execution

of tape

resident programs.

Loading DCP2

To load DCP2, first enter the DCP1 diagnostic mode by

doing the following steps:

1. Hold the CMD key and press the HOLD key.

2. Hold the CMD key and press the -(minus) key on

the numeric keyboard.

3. Hold the CMD key and press the

*

or x key on the

numeric keyboard.

The words DIAG DCP1 are displayed on line 1 at this

point.

4. Press the C key.

5. Hold the CMD key and press the 1 key on the

numeric keyboard.

Note: See the CMD 0 routine in

DCPl Diagnostic

Mode in this section.

6. Press

EXECUTE.

7. Follow the instructions on the display.

(

After completing the tape read program, the first file of

the CE diagnostic cartridge is loaded into read/write

storage and the following information is displayed:

DCP2

MENU

800 PRINTER MDI

820

COMMUNICATIONS/SERIAL I/O MDI

840 AUXILIARY TAPE MDI

860 TAPE WRITE MDI

(

890

DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINE CHART

ENTER THE MDI NUMBER

§fATUS:

ENTER

ENTER

'0'

IF

REPLY

THE OPTIONS

TO BE

ARE

RUN

TO BE DISPLAYED

XXX XXX is tne current EC number of this CE diagnostic cartridge.

The leftmost dash before the words

ENTER THE MOl

NUMBER TO

BE RUN flashes to indicate the position of

the next character to be entered from the keyboard. The

procedure

for entering the MOl number is found under

MOl in this section.

(

MOl (MAPs and Diagnostics Integrated)

MOl is MAPs and diagnostic programs integrated into a

single maintenance approach. MOl,

with the display and

the keyboard, allows you

to isolate machine failures by

responding

to information on the display screen.

Questions on the display require a response via the

keyboard. The MOl goes

to the next question or section

based on the keyboard input.

Loading MOl Sections

To load MOl sections, select the section from the OCP2

menu, enter the section number, and press EXECUTE.

An 0 {letter) can be entered along with the

MOl

sections number (but on the next line) to select a special

option or

to alter a previously selected special option.

Then, pressing

EXECUTE displays the MOl options.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-29

It is possible to enter and run MOl numbers not

appearing on the menu because the listed MOl sections

are subdivided into sections each having its own

number. These MOl sections are discussed

in greater

detail later. Subsections are used with some

of the

options mentioned

in the previous paragraph.

CAUTION

Entering these numbers directly runs the MOl out of its

normal sequence and. therefore. might give false results.

You should be familiar with the MOl options before

using this technique.

After you select the MOl number from the menu and

press

EXECUTE. the 5100 Portable Computer

automatically loads the MOl from the

CE diagnostic

cartridge and begins running it. As the MOl runs. the

steps

of MOl appear on the display screen.

The

MOl either runs to completion with no errors

detected and with no intervention required.

or it stops to

allow action. In this case. read the display to determine

the appropriate action. which includes the following:

Replace FRUs

Make an adjustment

Probe a logical level

Meter voltages

Exchange FRUs

Make

an observation

If a question is asked. answer it before pressing

EXECUTE

to continue. The format of the display with

several examples follows.

3-30

(

/

DCP2 Menu

MDI (MAP Diagnostic Integration)

(

Loading:

1. Select

the MDI section number from the DCP2 menu.

2. Enter

the MDI section number.

3.

Press the EXECUTE key.

This procedure loads and

automatically runs the MDI.

To stop the MDI and return to the MDI options, press the ATTN key.

The following message might appear if

the MDI halts:

ENTER Y OR N (B,

0,

T)

Y

Refers

to an answer to a specific question on the display

N

=

Yes}

=

No

screen. Enter

the appropriate answer and press the

EXECUTE key.

B

=

Back:

You can

enter B or BXX and press the EXECUTE key.

XX is the number of steps you want to back up in the

trace table.

0=

Option:

You can

enter

0

and press the EXECUTE key to display

the MDI options.

T

=

Trace:

You can

enter T and press the EXECUTE key to display

the

s~eps

that were executed along with the decision

(Y

or N) that was displayed. To obtain a

c~py

of the

trace table, press the key, press and hold the

CMD key, and press the; key.

I

I

I

MDI ran OK. Intervention required. Read

RESTART

(

"--Return to MAP

the display and take the

or

appropriate action.

press ATTN

key twice and

select

the next

MDI:

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3·31

DCP2

I

MOl Options

Loading:

1.

Select the MOl section from the DCP2 menu.

2. Enter the

MOl section number:

3. Press the

#

key.

4.

Enter the letter

0

(option).

5.

Press the EXECUTE key.

The

MOl option table is now on the display screen.

Note:

The

II

key will tab to the next entry instruction.

MODE:

STEP

Halts at each step and waits until the EXECUTE key is pressed to continue.

You can change the decision

of a step by keying in Y, N, B,

0,

or T.

RUN

(default selection) Runs

MOl automatically and halts when a question

must be answered.

NEXT STEP

NO: Enter the next step number to be executed. (If you are using the

loop on path option, you must enter the

stop number here.)

LOOP ON:

STEP

Allows looping on a specified next step number.

PATH

Allows looping on a path specified by the path start number and path

stop

number. The last step in the trace must be answered yes.

MOl

Allows looping a complete

MOl section in step and run mode.

UNTI L:(Use with loop on option)

Blank Loops until the

CMD and AnN keys are pressed (used with loop

on step).

YES

Loops until a yes decision

is obtained (used with loop on step).

NO

Loops

unti.1 a no decision

DIFFERENT

Loops until a decision different from the decision established

-

.

is obtained (used with loop on step).

by the trace

is obtained (used with loop on path or MOl).

PATH START NO: Defines the path start num,ber when loop on path

is selected.

PATH STOP NO: Defines the path stop number when loop on path is selected.

3-32

I '

MDI Display Format

(-

1

MOllO

STEP NO

I

2

XXXX

3

COMMAND TEXT AREA

4

QUESTION TEXT AREA

5

FIX TEXT AREA

6

7

SUPPLEMENTARY TEXT AREA

8

9

10

11

12

13

TEST -BITS

ON

14

MASK -

0300

INSTRUCTION AREA

15

RCVO -

0700

REPLY AREA

NEXT STEP NO. -

037

16

STATUS AREA

"-

I

Line

t

The name of the MOl and the step number that is currently running.

Lines

2-13

Contains the left

32

positions of the command text from the MAP. The right

32

positions

display

the supplementary text.

Lines

14, 15, 16

Instructions, replies, and status. The instructions are usually to press EXECUTE after entering

the reply (Y, N, B, 0, or T). Y means yes, N means no. The meaning of B-back, Q·option, T-trace

is explained later under

MDI Display Replies

in this section.

Supplementary Text Area

Line 2 The MOl section number (described under

Diagnostic Run Summary Chart

in this section).

Lines

12, 13, 14, 15

The bottom right of the display screen shows the data used to make the decision. TEST defines

the type of comparison used for the decision. The comparison is made between the data

defined by

MASK and RCVO. MASK is used to refer to either expected data or a mask for bit

comparisons. RCVO refers

to the data that is returned from the section and can be data, status,

or timing information.

MASK and RCVO refer to data strings between 1 and

24

characters.

The three classes of test are:

1.

Bit comparisons (bits on, bits off, bits not on,

bits

not off) compare the RCVO data against the

bits that are on in the mask. Zero bits in the mask

are

don't care bits.

2. Magnitude comparisons (low, high, equal, not equal,

less than or equal, greater than or equal) compare

the RCVO

data against the mask.

3. Within limits compares

that the RCVO data is with-

in the upper and lower limits specified by the mask.

A yes

or no decision is made based on these results.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-33

MOl

Message

Displays

The following message is displayed when a section was

run in step mode, the results

of the section were tested,

and a decision was made by the program based on the

results. (In this case, the decision is yes.) You

can

override this decision by entering an N or can also

select one

of the other options specified. When you

press

EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply and

proceeds accordingly.

1

IT[ST-

DECISION IS (Y,N,B,Q,T)

IMASK-

BITS

0300

ON

Y

I RCVIt-·

§T~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

INEXT STEP

0700

NO.-037

The following message is displayed when you must

manually answer the MOl question. You can answer yes

or no or select one of the other specified options.

When you press

EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply

and proceeds accordingly.

ENTER Y OR N (B,O,T)

§j~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

The following message is displayed when a remove,

replace, or adjust action (RRA) is required to correct the

failing

FRU or when a no trouble found (NTF) step is

reached. The reply defaults

to an 0, but one of the

other options can be selected. When you press

EXECUTE,

MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds

accordingly.

o

ENTER B,

0,

Ol~

T

§T~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

3-34

(

The following message is displayed when set up command

text is specified with an MOl test, when additional displays

of command text are required, when a GOTO STEP or

GOTO MAP is specified, or when a trace is displayed.

Pressing EXECUTE continues; however, if one of the op-

tions is entered before pressing EXECUTE, that option

is taken.

MOl Display Replies'

T

=

Trace -Displays the trace of the steps that were execu-

ted and the decision, yes

(V) no (N), associated with each

step. (A

go to step is designated by a G, where the G means

go

to a step within the same MOl.)

The trace

is erased

whe~

an MOl subsection is called. For

example,

MOl 800 has an MOl section 801. The MOl sub-

section

is called automatically as MOl 800 is executed.

But,

as you step through the MOl 800, you can see the

PRESS EXECUTE(B,O.T) TO

CONTINU~

§T~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

The following message is displayed when additional dis-

plays are needed

to show the entire trace table (256 steps

maximum). The reply defaults

to a T, but one of the

other specified options can be selected. When you press

EXECUTE,

MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds

accordingly.

ENTER T(D,D) TO CONTINUE TRACE

T

§f~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

The following message is displayed when a test is running.

You are instructed

to probe pins or .observe an opera-

tion. The diagnostic test runs until ATTN

is pressed, then

the MDI question message appears.

PRESS -ATTN-TO REPLY

~:;l

(:,

TUS:

I~UNN

I

Nei

(~/

(/

message on the display

that the MOl subsection will be

called

if you press EXECUTE. That is the last time you

can call the trace for

MAP 800 before it is erased.

While

in trace mode, 80 steps can be displayed on one dis-

play screen at a time.

If the trace contains more than 80

steps it is displayed on multiple display screens and EXECUTE

must

be pressed to page through multiple displays.

B

=

Back -Backs up one step in the MOl. A decimal num-

ber between 2 and

99 can be entered following the B to

back up more than one step at a time. Execution begins

at the step number you specified. If the number entered is

greater than the number of steps executed, the first step in

the trace is selected.

.you cannot back

out of an MOl program. If you are in

an MOl subsection, then you must return to the OCP2'menu

to return the previous MOL The previous MOl is called from

the OCP2 menu

by entering the MOl number and pressing

EXECUTE.

o

=

Option -Returns to the MOl options display so you can

enter new options. Pressing ATTN returns the OCP2 menu.

Returning Control

While the MOl is running, pressing the ATTN key returns

the

MOl option display. Pressing the ATTN key a second

time returns the OCP2 menu and pressing the ATTN key

a third time returns the

OCP1 diagnostic mode.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-35

MDIOptions

The options are aCcessed through the MOl options display by

pressing EXECUTE. The instructions

on how to call the

MOl options are provided on the display. The exception

to this is if you are in an MOl section that does not have

the

MOl

~ptions

as one of the display replies. In that

case, press ATTN, or hold CMO and press ATTN, to get

to the MOl options display. An illustration of the MOl

options display is shown below.

CAUTION

If you are using the MOl options on MOl 840 or 844,

remove the

CE diagnostic cartridge and do not insert it

until instructed

to do so on the display. The tape might

,

J

I

be

erased if inserted too soon.

MDI OPTIONS

MODE:::

1-51'['j:L

RUN

I

NEXT STEP NO. :::. __ .... _

I-RUN -I

LOOP ON -I

. I-STEP-I

1-UNTIL

-I

PATH START NO,·=_ ......... .

I-PATH-I

I-YES-------I

1-

I-MDI -I

I-NO

I-DIFFERENT-I

-I

PATH STOP NO, = __ . __

PRESS

PRESS

-(CMD)ATTN-TO STOP LOOPING

PRESS

-ATTN-

-EXECUTE-

TO RETURN

TO CONTINUE

TO DCP2

WITH THIS MDI

STATUS: ENTER REPLY

Mode:

Defaults to run if step is not entered.

Loop On:

Loop on options are intended to diagnose inter·

mittent problems. (Pressing

HOLD while looping might

STEP -Displays the results

of each test and waits until

cause a PROCESS CHECK.)

EXECUTE

is pressed before continuing to the next test.

It

is used to step through each step in the MOL You can

STEP -Loops

on the step specified by NEXT STEP NO.

alter each decision in step mode. The

MOl remains in

until CMD and ATTN are pressed or until one of the

step mode until manually changed

to run mode.

selected termination options of the until function is

met.

RUN -Proceeds automatically through the MOl per-

forming the designated

test and displaying the results.

PATH -Loops on the path specified by the PATH

"The run function stops and waits for EXECUTE to be

START NO. and PATH STOP NO. when the DIF-

pressed only when a question must be answered by the

FERENT option

is selected.

CE or when a fix is displayed.

MOl -Loops on the entire MOl when the DIFFERENT

Next Step No.:

Selects the MOl step number to be executed

option

is selected.

next. You have the option

of selecting any step within the

MOl (001-nnn). If an invalid step number is entered, an

error message

is displayed.

3-36

Until:

Looping termination options. Blank, YES, and NO

should

be

used with loop on STEP. DIFFERENT should

(

be

used with loop on PATH or loop on MOL These options

are recognized only when one

of the loop on options is

selected.

Blank (option field left blank) -Loops until

CMD and

ATTN are pressed, then returns

the MOl options to the

display screen.

YES -Loops until a yes decision for a diagnostic test

is obtained, at which time the screen describing the

current

MOl step is displayed, or until CMD and ATTN

are pressed giving the same results

as blank.

(

NO -Same as YES except loops until obtaining a no

d~cision

for a diagnostic test.

DIFFERENT -First a trace must be defined by pro-

ceeding through

the desired sequence of steps in the

MOl or path. Then the program loops on the predeter-

mined sequence of steps until the current sequence,

varies from

the predetermined sequence. When the loop

terminates, the last valid step of the sequence is dis-

played along with

the decision that varied. Question

steps are assumed

to have the same response each time

through

the loop as they had when the initial trace was

defined; therefore,

they do not have to be answered

each time.

Path Start No:

Defines the beginning step of the path.

Path

Stop

No:

Defines the ending step of the path.

(

Stepping and Looping

Step Through MOl

MODE

=

STEP

STEP -Displays the results

of each test and waits until

EXECUTE

is pressed before continuing to the next test.

It

is used to step through each step in the MOl. The CE

can alter each decision in step mode. The MOl remains

in step mode until manually changed to run mode.

NEXT STEP NO.

=

XXX

Loop On Step

MODE

=

STEP

STEP -Loops on

the step specified by NEXT STEP NO.

until CMD and ATTN are pressed or until one of the selec-

ted termination options of the until function

is met.

NEXT STEP NO.

=

XXXX

LOOP ON-STEP

UNTIL-blank, YES,

NO, DIFFERENT

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-37

Loop On Path

PATH -Loops

on the path specified by the PATH START

NO. and PATH STOP NO. when the DIFFERENT option is

selected.

Answer the questions exactly as they were answered

on

the initial pass through the path.

No intervention is required for the program to loop con-

tinuously. Howevet, a trace

of the desired sequence of

steps must first be created by proceeding through the path

before

the DIFFERENT option can be used correctly. The

DIFFERENT option uses the trace table

as a guide.

To use the loop

on PATH until DIFFERENT option:

1. With DCP2 loaded and the option menu displayed,

enter the selected

MOl number along with 0 for

options, and press EXECUTE. This initializes the

trace.

2. Enter STEP mode, then enter the path starting step

number into NEXT STEP

NO.

3. Press EXECUTE. This begins execution of the step

selected by NEXT STEP NO.

4. Proceed through the path steps answering those steps

that require intervention until you reach the desirecl

path stopping step. This builds

the trace of the steps

in the path. The last step must be answered yes.

5. Press ATTN

to return to the MOl options.

6. Enter:

RUN mode

NEXT STEP

NO. (use PATH STOP NO.)

loop on PATH until DIFFERENT

PATH START

NO.

PATH STOP NO.

7. Press EXECUTE to begin looping.

8. Press

(CMO) ATTN to stop looping. This returns to

the MOl OptiONS display where new options can

be

selected. To resume looping, press EXECUTE with-

out changing the options.

9. Looping stops

if the sequence of step execution

deviates from the initial sequence. The last executed

step

is displayed along with the decision that varied.

The looping options are cleared automatically so

that

pressing EXECUTE proceeds to diagnose the error

that occured.

3-38

Loop On MOl

MOl

-Loops on the entire MOl when the DIFFERENT

option

is selected.

Answer

the questions exactly as they were answered on the

initial pass through the MOL

No intervention is required for the program to loop con-

tinuously. However, a trace of

the desired sequence of

steps must first be created by proceeding through the

MOl

before the DIFFERENT option can be used correctly. The

DIFFERENT option uses the trace table

as a guide.

To use the loop on MOl until DIFFERENT option:

1. With DCP2 loaded and the option menu displayed,

enter the selected MOl number, and press EXECUTE.

This initializes the trace and begins running the

MOL

2. Proceed through the MOl answering the steps that

require intervention until the last step in the MOl is

reached. This builds the trace of the sequence of

steps that were executed. The last step must be

answered yes.

3. Press T and EXECUTE

to display the trace table.

Record the first and last steps from

the trace table

for the

MOl being run.

j

4. Press ATTN

to return to the MOl options.

5. Enter:

RUN ,mode, (do not change the NEXT STEP NO.)

loop on MOl until DIFFERENT

6. Press EXECUTE

to begin looping.

7. If looping does not start, repeat steps 2 through 6.

8. Press

(CMO) ATTN to stop looping. This returns to

the MOl options where new options can be selected.

To resume looping, press EXECUTE without chang-

ing the options.

9. Looping stops

if the sequence of step execution

deviates from the initial sequence. The last executed

step

is displayed along with the decision that varied.

The looping options are cieared automatically so

that

pressing EXECUTE proceeds to diagnose the error

that occurred.

MOl Subsections 890 Diagnostic Sections

The printer, auxiliary tape, and diagnostic sections MDls

on the DCP2 menu, are subdivided into individually

numbered subsections. These are especially useful

with

the MDI options previously described. In addition, they

can be entered directly into the DCP2 menu.

CAUTION

Entering MDI subsection numbers directly into the DCP2

menu runs

the MDI out of its normal sequence and can

These diagnostic sections allow you to select individual

MDI sections for diagnosing intermittent problems. The

diagnostic sections are normally run automatically under

control

of the MDI supervisor when tape write, printer,

auxiliary tape, and communications

MDI function MAPs

are executed. They can be run individually

by using the

diagnostic sections (890) and the following loading

instructions.

cause erroneous results.

(

A list

of the MDls and their subsections follows:

800 5103 Printer MDI Exercisor

801 Error Determination

802 Error Determination

803 Error Determination

804 Error Determination

805 Error Determination

820 Communications/Serial

I/O MDI

No MDI subsections

840 Auxiliary Tape

MDI

840

841

842

843

844

845

846

847

860 Tape Write MDI

861

890 Diagnostic Sections

891

892

893

894

(~.

Loading Instructions:

Load Diagnostic

DCP1 :

1.

Hold the CMD key and press the HOLD key.

2.

Hold the CMD key and press

the -(minus) key

on the numeric keyboard.

3.

Hold the

CMD key and press the

*

or x key on

the numeric keyboard.

The words DIAG

DCP1 are displayed on line 1 now.

4.

Press the C key.

5. Hold the CMD key and press the 1 key on the

numeric keyboard.

Note: See the CMD 0 routine in DCP1.

6.

Press EXECUTE.

7.

Follow the instructions on the display.

5100 Diagnostics Overview, 3-39

After the tape read programs are completed, the first

file of the CE diagnostic cartridge is loaded and the

OCP2 menu is displayed.

8. Select 890 from the OCP2 menu.

9. Press EXECUTE.

10. MOl allows the selection of the subsection

function (tape write, printer, auxiliary tape,

or

communications) to be exercised. Reply to the

appropriate question and press

EXECUTE.

11. The first step of each chart (MOls 891-894)

displays the section number, a brief description,

and the calling step number

of each diagnostic

section available. The calling step number is

also listed with each diagnostic section

description that follows later

in this section.

Record the step number listed

for the specified

diagnostic section, press

0

(option) and press

EXECUTE

to display the MOl options.

12. Enter

STEP, the step number as recorded in

number

11 above, and one of the loop on

options. Press

EXECUTE to begin.

13. The diagnostic section displays status

and/or

data as described under

MOl Display

Format.

Expected data or status is usually all

0' s to

force a Y decision for the MOl step. All N

decisions should be overridden by the operator

by keying in a Y

or an 0 (option) to avoid

running

an unwanted diagnostic section. Keying

in

an 0 to override either a Y or an N allows

immediate selection

of another diagnostic

section step or allows a looping option within

the same chart. A Y decision goes

to the first

step

of the chart to allow selection of another

diagnostic section step number. Return

to 11

above.

14. To stop, hold CMO and press ATTN. The MOl

options are displayed. Option and step numbers

can be selected

if desired. Pressing ATTN

again returns the

OCP2 menu.

3-40

,

,--

/

/

Diagnostic Program Routines

(

Routine numbers are displayed on the CRT during step

mode and, in many cases, during normal run mode. You

can use the routine numbers

in two ways:

1.

To locate (using MOl step mode) and loop on a

step within a specific test. You can do this using

the

MOl procedures.

2. To locate a specific test via MOl 890.

The following chart provides

an explanation of the test

and also shows the MOl 890 step number. Step

numbers are also displayed while running MOl 890.

(

(

(/

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-41

TAPE READ TEST AND AUXILIARY TAPE

DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES

These routines are used in MOls 840 through 847 and

MOl 893. The routine numbers

are the numbers used in

MDls 840 through 847. All tests with error codes return

0000.

Routine

Number Description Error Code Meaning

,

1

TR01

I.

TR02

TR06

TR07

3-42

Select subdevice test. This test is run as the first test in 0901 Failure of the F reset

MDls 840-847 and should be run in 893 before any other

command.

test. The first time this test is run

it asks you to enter the

subdevice address

with minimal error checking. Therefore.

because you enter the subdevice address.

840-847 and 893

can be run on any tape subdevice.

0903 Failure

of the subdevice

select command.

0906 Improper response

of the

subdevice.

Loop write read (LWR)

of data to the base I/O card only. 0909 Incorrect data read back.

for tape read test. and LWR of data to the tape adapter card

for auxiliary tape test.

Returns

to the MOl section the last error code that occurred 0954

Neither BOT nor

EOT status

when TR061 was run. This test is used only

in the auxiliary

is active.

tape tests.

not in tape read program.

0957

EOT status is not active.

0958

EOT status cannot be

cleared.

0960 BOT status is

not active.

0963

The load point hole (BOT

status) cannot be found (refer

to 229

for load point hole).

0966 BOT status cannot be

cleared.

Reads and compares file 1 on the diagnostic tape for correct 0994

Data read is not correct.

data using the

I/O supervisor.

Error codes 0009 and 0010 are used

to determine the end of 0001-0008 See error codes and halt

file 1 and indicate correct operation. Tape read branches

to 0011-0014 conditions in this section.

OCP2 if the operation is correct.

'

j

Routine

Number Description

Error Code Meaning

(~

(

r

"

(

(

(

TR08

Tests interrupts

from the tape control card. 0907

TR10 Returns the last error code that occurred

to the MOl section.

0982

This test is used only in the auxiliary tape tests, not in tape

read program.

0983

0985

0986

0987

0988

0989

TR39 Determines if the diagnostic mode line is active when it 0939

should not

be active. If it is active, eight read clocks are

generated by the tape control card, which,

in turn, causes an

interrupt from the base I/O (F2) card when one is not

expected.

TR40 Checks to determine if the tape clock line and write enable 0940

line become active and

that the read clock line is not an

open circuit. Every time the write enable line shifts, the read

clock line should pulse and cause an interrupt from the base

I/O (F2) card.

TR43

Checks the diagnostic mode line by changing it between 0943

write and read operations.

TR46 Tests the missing interrupts

for wrap through read/write 0946

head. This tests the tape control card detector circuits. The

select channel line is changed between channel 0 and

channel 1 ten times and

at least three interrupts must occur.

Interrupts occurred

incorrectly.

Status Error -Beginning of

tape status active once, but

not active now.

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock)

detected.

from either tape track.

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock) detected

from tape track 0 (format

track).

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock) detected

from tape track 1 (data

track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) detected on

tape track 0 (format track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) detected on

tape track 1 (data track).

Read Dsta Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) on either tape

track.

An interrupt occurred.

No interrupts occurred.

No interrupts occurred.

Less than three interrupts.

Diagnostic Program Routines 343

Routine

Number

TR47

Description

E"or Code

Meaning

All 1's or O's read from tape

control card.

/--

Checks the read data line to determine if it will go both 0947

-active and inactive. The program generates 10 read clocks

on the tape cOhtrol card

and reads the data associated with

th~se

read clocks .. There must be at least one 0 bit and one

t

bit read for this test to pass. A stuck bit causes all1's or.

all O's to be 'read.

Moves tape forward for two seconds. 0970

"'--

TR051

1

BOT or EaT was found; use

TR051 or TR052 routines to

reposition the tape.

"'--_/

TR052

1

TR06P,

Moves tape backward for two seconds.

Checks the beginning (BOT) and end (EOn of tape status

0954

indicators. The tape is moved past the single BOT holes and

the double

BOT/EaT holes.

If the test fails, the tape stops immediately.

0957

0958

0960

0963

EaT status is not active.

EaT status cannot be

cleared.

BOT status is

not active.

The load point hole (BOT

status) cannot be found (refer

to 229 for load point hole).

/

Neither BOT nor

EaT status

is active.

~~"

'.

0966

CAUTION

If an error occurs and the test is retried, the tape might 'go

off the end of the reel.

TR73

2

Tests the tape speed to determine if the motor speed is 0973

correct. The program rewinds the tape to the first set of

double holes and counts the time. When the load point hold

is found, the time is compared.

Remove the tape cartridge from the tape unit and attach a

jumper between tape control card pin U06

(-write enable)

and pin U08 (gnd). Wraps data through the base I/O card

and tape control card.

0995

BOT status cannot be

cleared.

-"

,

Tape speed not close to 40

inches per second.

TR95

The data returned was

incorrect.

0996

Indicates

that TR95 ran and

can be rerun by pressing

EXECUTE.

'If a 970 error results from the EOT hole t?eing in front of the tape mirror, manually move the tape to reposition the EOT hole.

2Looping on this test can cause a process check.

3-44

(,

(

Routine

Number

TR101

Description

Determines if both tape tracks return interrupts and if the

sync byte (hex

E7) can be read from both tracks.

Error Code

0982

Meaning

Status Error -BOT status

active once, but not active

now.

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock) detected

from either tape track.

Read Data Error -No

0983

0985

C~

0986

0987

0988

0989

l(

TR0312 Cartridge in place status (10) should not

be present. 0912

TR0315 File protect status (02) should be present. 0915

TR0318

LED on status (04) should be present.

0918

TR0321 BOT status (01) should

not be present; that is, sense bit (01) 0921

should

be on.

TR0324 EOT status (SO) should not be present. 0924

TR0327

Erase active (08) status should not be present.

0927

TR0330 Erase active (08) status for track 0 (format track) should be

0930

(.

present.

Note: This test leaves the erase coil on.

(j

interrupt (read clock) detected

from tape track 0 (format

track).

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock) detected

from tape track 1 (data

track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) detected on

tape track 0 (format track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) detected on

tape track 1 (data track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) on either tape

track.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-45

Routine

Number Description, Error Code Meaning

TR0333

Erase

activ~(08)

status for track 1 (data track) should be 0933 Bad sense bit found.

present.

Note: This test leaves the erase coil on.

0936

Bad sense bit found.

TR0336

Select magnet active status (20) should not be

present.

TR0337

Select magnet active status

(20) for forward tape motion

0937

Bad sense bit found.

should be present,

Note: This test leaves the forward tape and select magnet

active commands on.

TR0338 Select magnet active status (20) for reverse tape motion 0939 Bad sense bit found.

should be present.

Note:

This test leaves the reverse tape and

select magnet active commands on.

,TR0348

Cartridge in place status (10) should be present.

0948

Bad sense bit found.

TR0349

File protect status (02) should be present.

0949

Bad sense bit found.

TR0350

EOT status (80) should not be present.

0950

Bad sense bit found.

3-46

/"

'~/

t

/

TAPE WRITE ROUTINES

(~

These routines are used in MOl 860. The routine

numbers are the numbers used in MOl 860.

XS

in the

chart mean any number.

(

Routine

Number

BT01

Description

Average Velocity Test -Positions

the tape

to the file containing 1's

Expected

Information

Error

Code

Meaning

The average speed is computed to

two decimal points and returned as a

xxxx

XXXX

Average Deviation

f

and then begins the bit timing

Velocity Number

analysis test.

BT02

Acceleration Test -Checks the

xxxx

speed

of the tape from stop to

1500 bits after the tape has

reached 20 inches per second.

Graph

BT03 Deceleration Test -Checks the

xxxx

speed

of the tape for the 1040 bits

after the drop

of the run line. This

speed should be less than 20

inches per second.

Graph

(

4-digit decimal number in inches per

second. For example, a received

number

of 4006 is actually 40.06

inches per second. The average

speed is taken from the average

of

9,192 bit times. The deviation number

is returned

as the third and fourth

bytes.

The speed at bit 800 is computed

to

two decimal points and returned. as a

4-digit decimal number in inches per

second. If the speed is not within the

range

of 38.1 to 41.9 inches per

second for bits 800 to 1500, then that

speed

is returned.

The speed

of the 1500 bits is

displayed

in a graph. The speed in

inches per second is the vertical axis

and the 1500 bits are the horizontal

axis.

Each asterisk

(*)

on the graph

represents the average speed

of 36

bits on tape.

The speed at bit 1040

is returned as

a 4-digit decimal number computed

to two decimal points in inches per

second.

A graph

of the speed of the 1040 bits

is displayed. The speed

in inches per

second is the vertical axis and the

1040 bits are the horizontal axis.

Each asterisk

(*)

on the graph

represents the average speed

of 26

bits on tape.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-47

Routine

Number Description

BT06

Erase Data on Both Tracks

Expected

Information

Error

Code Meaning

/

~

/

XXXXXXXXXXXX

(six 2-digit error

codes)

00-14 The program returns six error codes

of two digits each. The first four error

codes are expected

to be 00. If they

are not 00, they are the system error

codes,

02-14. Refer to

Error

Codes in

this section.

r---"

~

BT11 Peak Shift-Head Azimuth Test on

>

to

>

Track 0 using a prewritten pattern

(4-digit decimal

of O's and 1's from file 15 -This

number computed

to

test searches

to file 15, then reads two decimal places)

the data on track 0

in 10 bit timing

analysis mode. Speed differences

between the odd and

even bits

should not exceed 10.0

microseconds.

BT21

Acceleration Test for Customer

>

Media -This test goes to file 1

and does the acceleration test

using BT02.

348

The first error code is from a search

to file 30.

The second error code is

from a mark

command to mark two files of two

records each.

The third error code is from another

search

to file 30 and a write header

command

to this file.

The fourth error code is from a write

and read

of data to file 30.

The fifth error code is

from a read of

the data on file 30 after it was erased

during the read operation. This error

code should be 09. This is the first

error code expected

to be other than

00.

The sixth error code is from a search

for file 30 after the format track is

erased. This error code should be 04.

The data returned is the even average

and odd average bit time

for track 0

in microseconds (see BT34).

The average speed is computed to

two decimal points and returned as a

4-digit decimal number in inches per

second. For example, a received

number of 4006 is actually 40.06

inches per second. The average

speed is taken from the average

of

9,192 bit times. The deviation number

is returned

as the third and fourth

bytes.

'--

..

'

j

/

".

/'

Routine

Number Description

Expected

Information

Error

Code Meaning

(

BT22 Sense Test XX

BT23

Write

Read Test -Writes and XXX ... XX (up to

reads the data in the MASK field

twelve

2-digit bytes)

on the display onto tape.

(

f

BT30 Peak Shift Test on Track 1 -

>

to

>

Returns the track 1 data generated

(4-digit decimal

during routine BT48. BT48 runs number computed

to

now if it was not run previously. two decimal places)

BT31

Symmetry Test on Track 1 -

>

to

>

Returns the track 1 data generated

(4-digit decimal

during routine BT47. BT47 runs number computed

to

now if it was not run previously. two decimal places)

(

BT34 (See note) Return Oata to MOl for

Test Spec Function -This test is

not

an MOl routine but a

subroutine

of BT47, BT48, BT30,

and BT31. This test generates

an

even average number and puts it

into the first 4 digits

of the MASK.

A high number is generated by

adding the permissible difference

to the low average number and

putting this in the last 4 digits of

the MASK. The program also

:(

generates

an odd average number

into the RCVO.

Bits: T1

T2 T3 T4

T5

T6

Odd average

=

average of

T1, T3, T5, etc

(/

Even average

=

average of

T2, T4, T6, etc

Note: Not accessible from

MOl

('

Returns the sense byte from the tape

unit.

Returned data is the correct data if

there is no error, or the first data to

miscompare if there is an error. For

example, if the data 012345 is the

expected data,

012345 ... ,

for a total of

512 bytes is written onto tape, where

01 is one byte, 23 the next byte and

45 the next byte, then repeat.

If the

data on tape is

ABCOEF, ABCOEF is returned

as

RCVO on the display so that all 512

bytes need not

be displayed.

The data returned is the even average

and odd average bit time for track 1

in microseconds (see BT34).

The data returned is the even average

and odd average bit time for track 1

in microseconds (see BT34).

All data is in decimal microseconds.

For example,

if the averages

calculated are 33.00 (even average)

and 34.05 (odd average) and the

permissible difference is 3.0, the

information displayed is:

TEST -Within limits

MASK -3300-3600

RCVO -

3405

Diagnostic Program Routines 3,49

Routine

Number

BT35'

Description

EOT Hardware Stop Test -This

test is similar to TR061 in the

auxiliary tape and tape read

routines. The difference is that the

time~outs

are different to make

sure that

the EOT stop hard works.

Expected

Information

Error

Code

Meaning

No errors.

/-

'

.....

0000

0954-

0966

See TR061 for explanation of possible

error codes.

No errors.

"'-_/

I

BT36

Test Bit Timing Hardware (no tape

0000

J

cartridge inserted) -This rest

~-

requires two jumpers to run and

the tape cartridge must not be

inserted attach jumpers on tape

control card pin B08

to pin S05,

and pin U06

to pin U08. The test

writes data, therefore it erases the

tape. The test determines

if the bit

timing hardware produces correctly

timed interrupts.

0811

Not enough interrupts occurred.

0812

Inte~rupt

J

times are incorrect.

BT37 Check System and Diagnostic Error

XXXXXXXX(two The last two error codes that were

Code -Error codes are generated

4-digit error codes) given are returned by this program as

by the programs each time they an 8-digit number.

are run. This test is used to clarify

previous errors. No hardware is

The first 4 digits are the last system

exercised by this routine.

error code (02-14, see Error

Codes in

this section).

The last 4 digits are the last error

codes from the tape

write routines

(0800-0960

as described in the error

code column

of this chart).

BT47 Symmetry Test on Track 0 -

>

to

>

The data (see BT34) returned is the

Searches

to file 30 and writes

(4-digit decimal

even average and odd average bit

zeros on both tracks. The test then number computed

to times for track 0 in microseconds.

reads the data on both tracks in bit

two decimal places)

timing analysis mode. The

permissible difference in speed

between the odd and even bits

should

not be more than 3.0

microseconds.

, Looping on this test can cause a process check.

3-50

r---"

',-

./

/

C

Routine

Number

BT48

Description

Expected

Information

Error

Code

Meaning

The data returned is the even average

and odd average bit time for track 0

in microseconds (see BT34).

Peak Shift Test on Track 0 -This

xxxx

to XXXX

(4-digit decimal

test is similar

to BT47 but writes

an alternating pattern of O's and number computed to

1's. The permissible difference

of two decimal places)

the

O's and 1's can be a maximum

of 8 microseconds.

C'

BT51 Erase Coils Open Test

f

TR01 Select Subdevice Test -This test

is used in

MAP 891 (auxiliary tape).

It is not used for MAP 860. This

test must be run before

891 is run

on auxiliary tape. This test must

also be run

if the operator ever

If

returns to the DCP2 menu during

MAP 891. The first time this test

is run

it asks you to enter the

subdevice address

with minimal

error checking; therefore,

891 can

be run on any tape subdevice.

(--

(

0000 No errors.

0808 Status

bit 5 is on after an F reset

instruction.

0809 Status bit 5 is on after a hex F7

control instruction command (erase

channel 0).

0810

Status bit 5 is on after a hex

FB

control instruction command (erase

channel 0). Status bit 5 indicates

LED

and erase coils OK.

0000 No errors.

0901 F reset failure on a

get

microinstruction. The status was

other than

FF after an F reset

instruction.

0903

Subdevice select failure. The

expected status

bit was not active.

0906 Improper response from the selected

subdevice. The expected subdevice

response status

was not active.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-51

5103 PRINTER DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES

These routines are used in MOts 800 through 805. The

routine numbers are the numbers used in MDts 800

through 805. The expected information column in the

chart contains the following types of information:

SA= Status byte A

SB= Status byte B

Device

Address

Bits 4-7 Device Name Bits 8-15

Definition

5

Printer

If Ry is even, status byte A

8

Print emitter latch 3

9

Print emitter latch 2

10

Print emitter latch 1

11

Wire check

or not ready

12

Forms emitter B

13

Forms emitter A

14

Not end of forms

15

Left margin switch

or not ready

If Ry is odd, status byte

8

=

Print motor latch B (0

9

=

not B)

Print motor latch A (0 not A)

10

Print emitter interrupt

11

Not ready interrupt

12

Forms motor latch B

(0 = not B)

13

Forms motor latch A (0

=

not A)

14

80 cps

=

0, 120 cps

=

1

15

1.1 ms or 2.66 ms (120 cps) or,

1.1 rns or 3.3 ms (80 cps) timer

interrupt

EC = Error code

An error code is a

2-digit decimal number described

under

Error

Codes in this section.

PLFP

=

Print line failure position

The print line failure position is a

4-digit decimal

number between 0001 and 0132.

TS

=

Test status

Test status is either 00

or FF. 00 indicates a test failure

and

FF indicates a pass.

3-52

(

("

(

Routine

Number Description

PT03

Expected

Information

Error

Code

Meaning

Returns status bytes A and B. Turns off (resets) forms motor

XX

XX

latch A and forms motor latch B in SA SB

the printer adapter card (B1A2).

Turns on forms motor latch A.

Turns on forms motor latch B.

PT04

PT05

XX

SA

XX

SB

Returns status bytes A and B.

XX

SA

SB Returns status bytes A and

B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

MOl 892 returns status bytes A and

B.

XX

PT06

PT07

PT08

Turns on forms

motor latch A and

forms motor latch B.

Gets Status.

XX

SA

XX

SB

XX

SA

XX

SB

Spaces forms in increments of

XX XX

1/16 of a line. Sixteen increments

SA SB

are spaced (one line). Detects

open forms predriver lines

or an

open forms stepper motor winding.

Checks the 2.66 ms (120 cps)

timer

or the 3.3 ms (SO cps) timer

in the printer adapter card.

XX

EC

50-59 Returns status bytes A and B.

error code.

PT09

XXXX

0240-0284 (120 cps)

0310-0341

(SO cps)

Returns a four-digit number in the

RCVD data location as the interval

between timer pulses. A decimal is

implied between the second and third

digits.

Returns a four-digit number in the

RCVD data location as the interval

between timer pulses. A decimal is

implied between the second and third

digits.

Returns status bytes A and B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

C

PT10 Same as PT09 except checks the

1.1 ms timer.

XXXX

0102-0114

PT11

PT12

PT13

Turns print motor latch A and print

XX

XX

motor latch Bon.

SA

SB

Turns the print motor latch Bon.

Turns print motor latch A on.

XX

SA

XX

SB

XX

SA

XX

SB

(

PT14

PT15

Turns off print motor latches A and

XX XX

B. SA SB

Turns

off the forms go and print

go latches that disable the two

printer motors.

Same

as PT15 except status is

returned after 300 ms delay.

XX

SA

XX

SB

(

PT15A

XX

SA

XX

SB

Returns status bytes A and B.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-53

Routine Expected

Number Description

Information

I

PT16 Gets and saves status bytes A and XX XX

B the first time it is called and

SA

SB

returns that status on all

subsequent calls.

PT20

Prints four lines of alternating Hs XX XX

XX

and blanks. Terminates early

if an SA

SB EC

error code occurs.

PT21

Ripple Print with Underscore -

XX·

XX XX

Prints one line of all characters SA SB EC

without underscore and one line of

all characters with underscore.

Terminates early if an error occurs.

PT23 Staggered Print Test -Prints Hs in XX XX XX

an ever expanding pattern until 132 SA SB EC

Hs are printed in a single line.

Terminates early

if an error occurs.

PT26

Gets the last error code value. XX

EC

PT01V6

Spaces forms six lines and repeats

XX XX XX

this sequence six times (36 lines).

SA SB EC

PT01V15 Spaces forms 15 lines and repeats

XX XX XX

this sequence 6 times (90 lines).

SA SB EC

PT17V1 Drives the print head carrier to the XX

XX

right margin, then ramps.

If an SA

SB

error occurs, the routine gets the

XX XXXX

status, issues a ramp command,

EC PLFP

and terminates.

PT17V10 Same as PT17V1 except repeats

XX XX

10 times.

SA SB

XX XXXX

EC PLFP

PT25V1 Left Margin Timing Test -Moves

XX XX

carrier

to the .right 3.3 inches (83.8

SA SB

mm), then ramps. Checks

to

XX XX

determine if left margin drops

EC TS

between print emitters 1 and

2.

Terminates the routine and causes

TS (test status) to be 00 if an error

occurs.

3-54

Error

Code

Meaning

Returns saved status bytes A and

B.

50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B

and an error code.

50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B

and an error code.

50-59 Returns status bytes A and Band

aFI

error code.

50-59 Returns an error code.

50-59 MDI 892 returns two status bytes and

an error code. All other M Dis return

only

an error code.

50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B

and an error code. All other MOls

return only an error code.

50-59 MOl 892 returns status bytes A and

B, error code, and print line position

of the print head where the failure

occurred.

All other

MDls return EC and PLFP.

50-59 MOl 892 returns status bytes A and

B, error code, and print line position

of the print head where the failure

occurred.

All other MOls return

EC and PLFP.

50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an

error code, and test status.

(

"-...

/

........../

~

...

'",

.

/

'

;-

'

.

....

-/

Routine

Number

Description

Expected

Information

Error

Code Meaning

(-

PT25V5

Same

as PT25V1 except repeats

XX XX

five times

if there are no errors.

SA SB

XX XX

EC TS

(

PT25V10

Same

as PT25V1 except repeats

XX XX

10 times

if there are no errors.

SA SB

XX

XX

EC

TS

COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER/SERIAL I/O

ADAPTER PROGRAM AND DIAGNOSTIC

ROUTINES

When the Communications Adapter/Serial I/O Adapter

features are installed, the diagnostic program provides:

• A test

of all of the status and control circuitry on the

expansion feature card. The test further isolates

problems

to either the 5100 Portable Computer or

customer provided data set/communications facility.

• A test

of the long space interrupt and the timer

interrupt

of the Communications Adapter feature. The

long space interrupt detects an end of transmission

request form the remote facility. The timer interrupt

controls the data sampling and data transmission

rates.

,

r

50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an

error code, and test status.

50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an

error code, and test status.

• A test

of the timer interrupt of the Serial I/O Adapter

feature. The timer interrupt controls the data

sampling and data transmission rates.

• A test

for each of the interrupt sources, both for the

ability

to set the interrupt via the hardware and reset

the interrupt via the microcode.

• Data tests of various bit combinations that isolate

problems between the 5100 Portable Computer and

customer provided modem/communications facility

using a manually attached wrap connector

to further

isolate problems

to the defective FRU in the 5100.

The diagnostic routines are used in MOl 820. The

routine numbers shown

in the following chart are used

in MOl 820.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-55

Routine

Returned

Information

Number Description

Status Data (hex)

Meaning

Routines COMOO through COM25 test the communications Adapter feature. Neither the data set nor the wrap

connector needs

to be attached for routines CO MOO through COM05.

CO MOO

Resets the expansion feature card.

COM01 Returns communications status.

XX

One byte of sense status.

COM02 Tests for timer interrupt in transmit 96 Good test.

mode.

COM03 Tests 134.5 bps timer interrupt

96

0200 through Good test.

rate. 02F2

Data is the rate in tens

of p.s. 00 0700 No interrupt occurred.

COM04

Tests 300 bps timer interrupt rate.

96

0147 through

Good test.

014E

Data is the rate

in tens of p.s.

00

0700 No interrupt occurred.'

COMOS Tests 1200 bps timer interrupt rate.

96

0381 through Good test.

0399

Data is the rate in tens

of p.s.

00

0700 No interrupt occurred.

The communications wrap connector must

be attached for routines COM06 through COM10.

COM06 Tests

for long space interrupt EF 1886 through Good test.

when long space received with

1800

terminal ready set.

00

61A8 No interrupt occurred.

COM07 Tests for inactive long space

00

Good test.

interrupt when continuous mark

received

with terminal ready set.

COM08 Tests

for inactive long space

00

Good test.

interrupt when short space

received with terminal ready set.

COM09 Tests that long space interrupt 87

Good test

for communications

reset command resets the interrupt adapter.

level and long space interrupt

status.

96 Good test for Expansion feature.

3-56

/

/

"'--

/

Routine Returned Information

(-

Number Description Status

COM10

Tests that the Expansion feature

86

reset command resets the interrupt

level and long space interrupt

status.

96

(

COM11

Tests that alternating bit patterns

can be transmitted and wrapped

back correctly.

COM12 Tests that all

O's pattern can be

(

transmitted and wrapped back

correctly.

COM13

Tests that all

1's pattern can be

transmitted and wrapped back

correctly.

COM14 Tests

for timer interrupt when start 97

bit received while in receive mode.

COM15 Tests

for inactive timer interrupt

00

when no start

bit received while in

receive mode.

COM16 Tests that dropping out

of receive

00

mode after a start

bit is received

prevents a timer interrupt.

ij

,-<;

'

"

COM17 Tests for an inactive timer interrupt

00

when a short start

bit is received

while

in receive mode with the

start

bit check enabled.

COM18

Tests

that a receive data bit can be 86

set and that the Expansion feature

reset command resets it.

96

03

COM19

Tests that data set ready and clear

E6

(

to send status bits can be set.

F6

(

Data (hex)

10 bytes

of AA

10 bytes of E1

10 bytes

or E2

10 bytes

of 00

10 bytes

of E1

10 bytes of E2

10 bytes of FF

10 bytes of E1

10 bytes of E2

Meaning

Good

test for communications

adapter.

Good

test for Expansion feature.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

Good test.

Good test.

Good test.

Good

test for communications

adapter.

Good

test for Expansion feature.

Bit cannot be set.

Good test for communications

adapter.

Good test for Expansion feature.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-57

Data set must be attached for routines COM20 through

COM25. These routines test the communications

network. The status

is displayed on the bottom line.

COM20 through COM25 routines

are used in MOl 894

only.

Routine

Number

COM20

COM21

Description

Transmits solid mark.

Transmits solid space.

Comments

Causes line disconnect if either' the transmitting or

receiving data set is strapped for a long space

disconnect.

COM22

COM23

COM24

COM25

Transmits 300 bps alternating bit pattern.

Transmits 134.5 bps alternating bit pattern.

Receives and analyzes 134.5 bps alternating bit

pattern.

Receives and analyzes 300 bps alternating bit

pattern.

Results

of the analysis are displayed in a graph with

decimal numbers.

Results of the analysis are displayed in a graph with

decimal numbers.

Routine

Number Description

Returned Information

Status Data (hex) Meaning

Routines 51001 through 51015 test the Serial I/O Adapter feature. Neither the I/O device nor the wrap connector

needs to

be attached for routine 51001 through 51006

51001

51002

51003

Returns serial

I/O adapter status. XX One

byte

of sense status.

Good test.

21 CA through

21E8

2710

1681 through

169F

2710

DB 38 through

OB56

2710

0009

2710

Good test.

No interrupt occurred.

Good test.

No interrupt occurred.

Good test.

No interrupt occurred.

Good test.

No interrupt occurred.

."

..

/

Tests for timer interrupt in transmit 96

mode.

Tests

FFFF timer interrupt rate

constant.

Data is the rate in tens

of

p.s.

96

00

96

00

96

00

96

00

51004 Tests

AAAA timer interrupt rate

constant

Data is the rate

in tens of p.s.

51005 Tests 5555 timer interrupt rate

constant.

Data is the rate in tens of p.s.

51006 Tests 004F timer interrupt

Data is the rate

in tens of p.s.

r'

3-58

(

(

('

Routine

Number Description

Returned Information

Data (hex)

Status

Meaning

The serial

I/O adapter wrap connector must be attached for routines 51007 through 51014.

51007

51008

Tests that data set ready and clear

F6

to send status bits can be set.

Tests that alternating bit patterns

can be transmitted and wrapped

back correctly.

Tests that all O's pattern can be

transmitted and wrapped back

correctly.

Tests that all 1's pattern can be

transmitted and wrapped back

correctly.

Tests for inactive timer interrupt

00

when no start bit received while in

receive mode.

Tests

for timer interrupt when start 97

bit received while in receive mode.

Tests that dropping out of receive

mode after a start bit is received

prevents a timer interrupt.

10 bytes of AA

10 bytes

of E1

1 0 bytes

of E2

10 bytes of 00

10 bytes

of E1

10 bytes

of E2

10 bytes of FF

10 bytes

of E1

10 bytes

of E2

Good test.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good Test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

51009

51010

51012

51011

51013

Good test.

Good test.

00

t

51014

Tests

for an inactive timer interrupt

00

when a short start bit is received

while in receive mode with the

start

bit check enabled.

Good test.

The serial I/O adapter wrap connector should not be attached for routine 51015. Probe pin 8 on the serial I/O

connector.

51015 Tests the '+receive line signal

detector' signal line.

The

CE probe UP light should be on.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-59

Error Codes

The CE diagnostic error codes are 800 through 999.

Refer

to

Diagnostic Program Routitles

in this section for

the error codes and their meanings.

The following list

of error codes are hardware related

only. The BASIC or APL language error codes are in the

APL or BASIC reference manual.

The display format

for hardware error codes is ERROR

xxx

yu.

and is displayed on line 15 of the display. The

xxx represents the error code, y represents the failing

device,

and zz represents the subdevice address.

'The subdevice address allows the 5100

to distinguish

,between

I/O devices using the same device address, as

in the case of the internal and auxiliary tape units.

The subdevice address

can be one of many addresses

depending

on the number and type of subdevices

attached. The subdevice addresses

for the tape units

are:

Internal tape unit -80

Auxiliary tape unit -

40

/

Customer Error Code Descriptions

(

Device

(

Tape

:(

'~

'J

.';"

,(

(~~

f."

Error Code Description

Device

Error

Address Subdevice

xx

y

Address zz

002 E

'Z2.

Invalid command for device or invalid sequence for device -

Incorrect device address or file number specified by the user.

003

E

z:z. Status error -Incorrect status sensed. The most recent status

byte is located at address hex 008F (refer

to

Status

under

Tape

Adapter I/O Lines

in Section 4).

004 E zz Time-out -Data cannot be found on tape, or a rewind operation

exceeded three minutes. (Data might not be found

if the tape is

positioned where there is no data or

if the tape unit failed.) A

time-out occurs during the rewind operation if the tape unit fails

to sense the load point hole. If the tape unit senses the larger

BOT /

EOT holes, the tape moves forward looking for the load

point hole until the

time-out occurs.

005 E zz Cartridge not inserted -With a cartridge inserted, status bit 3 is

0, but should be 1.

006

E

'Z2.

File protect -The file protect arrow is pointed to SAFE for a write

operation. Status bit 6

is sensed as a 1 but should be

a

(indicates

tape

can be written).

007 E zz Cyclic redundancy check error -The data track CRC is bad (refer

to

Error Checking

in Section 4). Obtaining a correct CRC requires

proper operation of a" read/write components in the tape unit.

An excessively used tape can cause 007 errors. Tape life is

several thousand head passes on a customer cartridge and

approximately 500 head passes on a

CE diagnostic cartridge.

008 E zz Records or files out of sequence -Format record sequence

numbers or header file numbers are not read

in the correct order

(refer

to

Tape Writing and Formatting

in Section 4).

009

E

'Z2.

End of data -End of data (hex 42) was read from the record type

byte

of a data record when end of data was not expected. The

tape unit is not usually the cause

of this error.

010 E

zz End of file -A read or write operation was attempted beyond the

last record on the file. The tape unit is not usually the cause

of

this error.

011 E zz

Specified file number cannot be found -A hex FF (end of marked

tape) was read from the header record file type byte before the

user specified file was found. The tape unit is not usually the

cause of this error.

012 E

'Z2.

Physical end of tape -EOT status bit

a

was sensed as a 1, which

indicates

an EOT hole was sensed. An incorrect number of files or

an incorrect file size can cause this error.

013 E

'Z2.

Tape unit not ready An incorrect device address was specified by

the user

for the tape unit or there was not status response from

the tape unit.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-61

Device

Error

Error Code

Device

Address Subdevice

y

Address zz

E

'ZZ

Description

,/

xx

Tape

(continued)

5103 Printer

014

"

Specified subdevice is not attached -An invalid subdevice was

specified by the user

or expected subdevice status was not

sensed.

Printer not attached -An incorrect device address was specified

by the user for the printer, or returned status on bus in was hex

FF.

End of forms -'+End of forms' line is down. This is caused by a

defective switch and associated circuits, a maladjusted switch, or

/-

"---~

013

5

00

i

050

5

00

!,

~i'

~;'

I

051 5

052 5

054

5

055 5

056 5

3-62

00

00

00

00

the absence of forms.

Printer not ready -Printer voltages (+24 Vdc or 10.8 Vdc) out of

tolerance or a wire check occurred with the print head at the left

margin.

Forms step time-out -A forms emitter pulse did not occur within

approximately

two seconds from the previous forms emitter pulse.

This timing does

not apply during the forms movement stopping

sequence.

00 Wire check -Indicates that a print wire driver was on too

long. If the print head is in the left margin and' -wire on' is

down, a

051 error occurs. If the print head is not in the left

margin and

'-wire on' is down, a 054 error occurs.

Undefined interrupt -'-Interrupt request 2' line is down but none

of the three interrupt bits from the printer adapter are on:

Print emitter interrupt Status byte B bit 2

Not ready Status byte B bit 3

1.1 ms or 2.66 ms(120

cps) timer or 1.1 ms or

3.3 ms (90 cps) timer

interrupt

Incorrect print emitter sequence -The current print emitter and

previous print emitter are out

of sequence. Print emitter sequence

when printing:

right is

1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1 etc

left is 3,

2, 1, 3, 2, 1, 3 etc

/--~

"-

j

Device

Error Code

Error

xx

Device

Address

y

5

Subdevice

Address zz

00

Description

("

5103 Printer

057

Missing print emitter pulses -A print emitter pulse was not found

(continued)

(

(

,

Tape

{

058 5

059 5

900 to E

999

00

00

xx

during the specified time (150

ms -SO cps, 100 ms -120 cps).

The print head stepper motor begins turning when it receives

pulses from the printer adapter. Error checking begins when the

print head stepper motor is up

to speed. If a print emitter pulse

does not occur during the 100 ms or 150 ms timing, a 057 error

occurs.

If a print emitter pulse does occur but is not the expected

pulse, a 056 error occurs. Refer to Print Emitter Error Timing

following these error codes.

Failures that prevent the carrier from moving (broken belt) cause a

057 error. Light mechanical binds or print emitter failure usually

cause a 056 error.

Timer interrupt time-out -Defective 1.1 ms or 2.66 ms (120 cps)

timer or 1.1 ms or 3.3 ms (SO cps) timer. Timer accuracy is

checked by running the printer diagnostic program (MOl 800).

Overspeed error -Five or six print emitters occurred during one

print head stepper motor step. Normal number

of print emitters is

2

to 4 per motor step.

Diagnostic errors generated by diagnostic sections. Refer to

Diagnostic Program Routines or MAP 300 for error definitions.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-63

SERIAL I/O ERROR CODES

The display format for serial I/O error codes is:

ERROR xxx yyy

where xxx is the error code and yyy is the device

address

of the failing device.

Device

Error Codes

Description

Error Device Address

510

002

yyy

An invalid command was sent to an I/O device. For example:

• A REWIND (BASIC) or )REWIND (APL) command is issued to an I/O

device.

• An invalid device characteristic was specified

to the command device.

• The input buffer size was increased after the input device was opened.

• An invalid parameter was specified when opening the command device

or an I/O device.

003

yyy

In modem mode, a data terminal ready from the

I/O device is off during a

5100 transmit operation. In terminal mode, data set ready from the

I/O

device is off during a 5100 transmit operation. These conditions can be

caused by:

• The I/O device does not conform to the EIA RS232C standard

interface.

• A defective cable.

• The

I/O device power is not on.

• The

I/O device is attached with the wrong cable.

3-64

/

Device

Error

Error Codes

Device Address

Description

(

SIO 003

yyy

(continued) (continued)

(-

(

004

yyy

010

yyy

(

013

yyy

014

yyy

(/

In modem mode, request to send (RTS) from the I/O device dropped

during a 5100 receive operation. In terminal mode, clear

to send (CTS)

from the I/O device dropped during a 5100 transmit operation. These

conditions can

be caused by:

• The

I/O device does not conform to the EIA RS232C standard

interface.

• A defective cable.

• The

I/O device is attached with the wrong cable.

• The

I/O device power is not on.

• The wrong mode (modem, ignore, terminal, or set) is specified.

Hardware malfunction.

Hardware malfunction.

The 5100 recognized

an end-of-file condition. This condition can be

caused by:

·

Entering CMD

O.

·

In modem mode, data terminal ready from the I/O device is off during

a 5100 receive operation.

·

In terminal mode, data set ready from the I/O device is off during a

5100 receive operation.

The Serial

I/O Adapter feature hardware is not installed or it is defective.

The Serial

I/O Adapter program is not loaded in user storage.

An invalid device address was specified.

Diagnostic Program Routines_ 3-65

PRINT EMITTER ERROR TIMING (NOMINAL

TIMINGS)

I-

1

Print Emitter

Emitter Sequence

=

1, 3

-.fl

120 cps

SO cps

0.S3

1.25

"ffiS

"I-

2

I

I

n

n

n

n

,-----!fl

3

1

0.S3

1.25

ms

"I-

I

0.S3

1.25

ms

-I-

I

0.S3

0.S3

1.25

1.25--1

'-"'--'ms I

ms

2

3

·1-

I

I

I

~.

One missing

I

I

'-X

lOne missing

print emitter

I

I

I

i

I

I

I

I

: print emitter

=

error 056

I

I

Error 056

I

I

I

I

1

I

occurs here

!

,

:

I

71

j

I

I

Emitter sequence

=

1, 1

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I Two missing print

Two missing

1

print emitters

!/"",!

I

1

I

I

emitters

=

error 056 or 057

I

I

I

I

I

X

I

X

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Error 056 timing

------1-""

I

starts in this area

100 ms (120 cps)

150

ms (SO cps)

If error 057 timing

starts

here.-------....

an error 057 occurs

100 ms or 150 ms later -

-~­

100

ms (120 cps)

because no print emitters

150

ms (SO cps)

were present during this

time.

Three or more missing

If error 057 timing starts here,

print emitters

=

error 057

an error 056 occurs here

-----------

because an out of sequence

print emitter was sensed before

3.3 ms or 2.66 ms elapsed for

error code 057.

TAPE READ TEST ERROR CHART

(

4

-

(

-:,

,1.

,{

(

(

Error Code

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

901

903

906

907

909

912

915

918

921

924

927

930

933

936

937

938

939

940

943

Meaning

A TIN key pressed

Incorrect command detected

Machine error

Timeout

Cartridge in place errors

File protect error

Data error

Sequence error

End of data test

End of file test

End of mark test

End of tape test

Device not attached

Device not selected

Device reset error

Card logic test error

Subdevice address error

Interrupt error

Wrap test-no data

Cartridge in place error

File protect error

LED/PTX test

LED/PTX test

LED/PTX test

Erase mode test

Erase mode test-channel 0

Erase mode test-channel 1

Select magnet test

Forward select magnet status test

Reverse select magnet status test

Interrupt error

Wrap

test-no interrupt

Wrap test-extra data

Area Tested

Keyboard

F2, G2

F2, tape control card

Read/write head

Cartridge in place switch

File protect switch

Tape cartridge,

read/write head

Tape cartridge, read/write head

Tape cartridge

Tape cartridge

Tape cartridge

Tape cartridge

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2, tape control card

F2

Cartridge in place switch

File protect switch

LED/PTX assembly

LED/PTX assembly

LED/PTX assembly

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

Select magnets

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

Tape control card

Tape control card

Diagnostic Program Routines

3-67

Error Code

946

947

948

949

950

951

Meaning

Wrap test-read/write head

Wrap test-no data

Cartridge

in place error

File protect error

End of tape test

Tape motion test (forward)

Area Tested

Read/write head

Tape control card

Cartridge in place switch

File protect switch

Tape cartridge

Tape motor assembly, forward select magnet

/'

""~

"--

952

953

954

. 957

958

960

963

966

970

973

982

983

985

986

987

988

989

994

995

996

3-68

Tape motion test (reverse)

Tape motion test

BOT and EOT test

EOT test

Tape speed test

BOT test

BOT test

Tape speed test

BOT and EOT test

Tape speed test

BOT test

Read data error

Read data error-channel 1

Read data error-channel 0

Sync byte test-channel 0

Sync byte test-channel 1

Sync byte test

Read data error

Wrap

test-no error

Wrap test OK

Reverse select magnet

Brake arm

LED/PTX assembly

lED/PTX assembly

Cartridge stop blocks

LED/PTX assembly

Cartridge stop blocks

Cartridge stop blocks

F2, tape control card

Cartridge stop blocks

F2, tape control card

Tape control card

Read/write head

Read/write head

Read/write head

Read/write head

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

Tape control card

None

/

,

"~

/

-'"

Service Aids

ERROR INDICATORS

There are two error indicators on the 5100-the control

panel

PROCESS CHECK light and messages on the

display. The

PROCESS CHECK light is activated by

parity errors detected

in any of several functional units.

(See

Controller

in Section 4.) When the PROCESS

CHECK light is activated, the machine stops immediately

with the error latched. This allows you

to identify the

type

of error by means of the logic probe.

Error messages are displayed only when enough

of the

5100 internal functions are operating

to ensure that the

display message is accurate. Error messages appear

whenever the customer programs sense

an error

condition or when the

CE diagnostic programs are run

and

an error occurs. The errors that occur when the

diagnostic programs run are coded

to provide entry

points

to the MAPs.

Halt codes

are displayed when a failure occurs during

the bring up program. When the bring up program

is

run, a sequence of letters (A through K) is displayed;

each letter indicates the completion

of a portion of the

bring up program.

If a failure occurs during bring up,

the last letter

of the sequence indicates the failure that

occurred. This information

is used in the MAPs to

determine the cause of the failure.

Moving the switch from the RUN position stops

program processing upon completion

of the E cycles of

the current microinstruction.

To see the effect

of the run switch when the 5100 is

processing, set the DISPLAY REGISTERS switch

to the

DISPLAY REGISTERS position. Register 0

of one of the

program levels changes rapidly unless the 5100 is halted

by a halt microinstruction. Moving the run switch from

the RUN position stops register 0 and allows you to

read the hex numbers on the display. The 5100 remains

stopped until the run switch

is returned to the RUN

position or until the step switch is pressed.

(./

(

Step Switch

The step switch has no effect on the operation of the

5100 unless the run switch is moved from the

RUN

position. When the step switch is pressed, the 5100

executes one microinstruction and then stops. The step

switch must

be pressed and then released in order to

execute each microinstruction. Pressing the step switch

moves the number

in register 0 of the current program

level

to the next microinstruction address as each

microinstruction is processed.

(

JUMPERS

Machine Check Jumper

CE Switches

Two CE switches, run and step, are located inside the

5100 next

to the display assembly. Removing the top

cover allows access to these switches. The run switch

is the

two-position toggle switch and the step switch is

the small momentary switch.

This jumper connects pin G2-S07 to G2-S09 on the

5100 A 1 board. Removing this jumper allows the

controller

to continue functioning when an error occurs

on the machine check line. Misleading results can be

received by running

with the jumper removed.

Basic Language Jumper

Run

Switch

The run switch controls the operational state of the

5100. To execute programs, the run switch must be in

the

RUN position. This is the processing state and the

switch must be

in this position when the 5100 is

returned

to the customer.

This jumper connects pin F2-S04 to F2-UOB on the A1

board. The jumper ties the '+APL switch' line to ground.

Display Jumper

This jumper connects pin J2-G07 to J2-UOB. To use

the jumper,

see Note on page 2 of 551 in the

Circuits

section of this manual.

Service Aids 3-69

-_.--

..

-

-_. ---.-

DISPLAY REGISTERS

The remaining level 0 registers contain hex EEEE.

To display the hex registers and

read/write storage. size,

ROL 1

=

hex 2345 •

the DISPLAY

REGISTERS switch must be in the

RFL 1

=

hex FEDC

II

DISPLAY REGISTERS position. This displays the first

512 bytes or 256 halfwords

of storage. The first 64

halfwords are the registers.

The remaining level 1 registers contain hex DDDD.

The 64 registers (halfwords) are divided into 4 levels

(0,

ROL2

=

hex 9ABC ..

1, 2, and 3) of 16 registers each

(0

through F). The

MAPs refer

to the registers and levels in an abbreviated

The remaining level 2 registers contain hex CCCC.

manner. For example, R1 L2 means register 1 level 2.

ROL3

=

hex BCBC

II

The position of the L3Z-64-R32 switch determines the

RFL3

=

hex FFFF

II

number

of registers displayed. In the L32 position the

32 registers in levels

0

and 2 are displayed. Likewise, in

The remaining level 3 registers contain hex BBBB.

the R32 position the 32 registers

in levels

1

and 3 are

displayed. To display all 64 registers, move the switch

Register

to 64.

level Use

The following examples and the illustration show

how to

o

Normal Machine Operation

locate certain registers within the various levels. Use the

Communication/Serial

I/O

Mode

numbers

in lines 5 and 6 to help locate the registers in

2

Printer and Tape

each level.

3

Keyboard

Note: These register bytes are displayed vertically.

ROLO

=

hex 1234

II

R1 LO

=

hex 5786 •

R

FLO

=

hex

0000

II

RBL2

RAL2

7

EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

Level 2

I~~C!I:"CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

A

CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

C

CCCCCCCC C

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB F

Line

5

Line 6

00~~~~22333F5566778899AABBCCDDEEFF

0000

00~~2233445566778899AABBCCDDEEFFOO~~2233FF5566778899AABBCCDDEEFF

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

OOOOOOOpOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

L32

R32

3-70

Read/Write Storage Size

In this example, the read/write storage size = hex 3FFF

Altering Storage Size

To alter the storage size

to a value less than the

available storage size

of the machine:

1.

2.

Hold the CMD key down and press the HOLD key.

Hold the CMD key down and press the -(minus)

key.

Press the A key.

Enter OOAS

The address of the last byte of installed read/write

storage is stored in read/write storage halfword hex

OOAS. Read/write storage size is measured each time

the bring up program is run and is not valid at hex

OOAS

until checkpoint H is displayed.

B

(

(

The hexadecimal number

read/write storage size

indicates the amount

of read/write storage installed.

Read/write storage size

=

hex 3FFF-16K (K2, K4)

Read/write storage size

=

hex 7FFF-32K (L2, L4)

Read/write storage size = hex BFFF-48K (M2, M4)

Read/write storage size = hex FFFF-64K (N2,

N4)

All other values for read/write storage size are invalid

unless the PATCH program or serial I/O microprogram is

loaded.

3.

4.

5.

B.

Enter the storage size you desire. The size

~nt~~r~rtF.

must be smaller than the available storage size of

the machine.

Press the SPACE bar.

Hold the CMD key down and press the

*

(multiply)

key (for BASIC) or the x (multiply) key (for APL).

Enter BE.

Enter 1200 (for BASIC) or Sooo (for APL) and

press

EXECUTE.

Display the registers. The storage size you entered

will be in storage location

OOA8

6.

7.

S.

9.

10.

D.

11.

Read/Write Storage Addressing

Press RESTART to return to the original storage

size

of the machine.

008F

OOOO _____

{358EEEEEEEEE

0030

-DDDDDDDDDDDDDFD

BBBBBBBBBBBBBFF

00401~~2~4~7~6~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~E~C~

0080~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~F=F,

0100

c:

0140

0180--1-=======-=-=i1===.:..=,.;;r::.==~1=======-=-=i1=====-=-=-=

0198

OlBD

Service Aids 3-71

PRINT PLOT FORMS MOVEMENT EXERCISER

PROGRAM

The print plot forms movement exerciser program is

used

to check the 5103 Printer for' forms movement

problems. This program is contained on the print

plot/BASIC or the print plot/ APL tape cartridge. The

printout

of the program follows:

I

I

The program plots

two sets of parallel horizontal lines.

These lines are tolerance lines. The program then

,

;1

alternately plots one

dot at a time within each set of

tolerance lines. If the forms movement is working

correctly, the dots should be plotted within the tolerance

lines. After plotting all of the dots, the program then

plots the parallel vertical lines.

If the forms movement

is working correctly, these lines should be the same

length

as the distance between the top and bottom

horizontal lines; the density

of the vertical line should be

consistent.

Use the following procedure to run the print plot

exerciser program:

1. If in BASIC mode, load the print plot/BASIC

forms movement exerciser program. See

Appendix

A.

Print Plot/BASIC Forms Movement Exerciser

Program of the

IBM 5100 Print Plot/BASIC

User's

Manual,

SA21-9265. If in APL mode, load the

print

plot/ APL program. See

Appendix

A.

Print

Plot/ APL Forms Movement Exerciser Program

of

the

IBM 5100 Print Plot/APL

User's

Manual,

SA21-9264. The file name is PLOTDIAG.

Watch the results on the 5103 Printer. If the dots

are

not within the tolerance lines or the vertical

lines are not the correct length

or density, use the

Print Plot Error Chart

in this section.

3-72

/

Print Plot Error Chart

START

Use

.MAP 810

No

Yes

No

Run customer

job using this

chart

No

Yes

Run print plot test

using chart then

run

MOl 800

(

Yes

Reru n test usi ng

only amount of

paper required

Do forms emitter

disk adjustment

and emitter timing

Print emitter pick-

up, left margin, and

hold down bracket

adjustment check

for binds

Yes

Remove

tractor

assernbly and

rerun test

Notes:

Also verify:

1. Platen gear backlash

2. Forms feed stepper

motor gear backlash

Do the following adjustment:

1. Platen and paper

deflector

2. Platen release eccentrics

3. Platen pressure rolls

4. Check a frame

alignment

5. Print head adjustment

6. Print head ribbon shield

No

Verify all adjust-

ments and

use

scope procedure

on

forms emitter

Loop

MOl 800

Service

Aids 3-73

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting

Guide

This guide is a summary of the 5100 diagnostics and a

guide

for troubleshooting intermittent failures.

5100 DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY

The 5100 diagnostics start testing a small area of the

machine and gradually expand

to test the complete

system.

Each diagnostic tests a specific area and

overlap each other. For example, the

ROS diagnostic

tests

ROS but, because ROS contains the printer

microinstructions, some printer operations are indirectly

tested. Normally the tests should be run in the

sequence shown on the

Diagnostic Summary Chart.

However, in the case of intermittent failures, this

sequence can be altered depending on:

-The information you have concerning the failure.

Whether or not this

is the first call.

-How frequently the failure occurs.

There are three categories of diagnostics:

• Exercisers

• Failure isolation

• Utilities'

Exercisers

The diagnostics that fall into the exerciser category are

the bring up and

ROS resident programs. These

programs exercise the machine and halt when failures

occur.

Now you can use the MAPs to locate the failure

or,

if the failure is intermittent, use the

Diagnostic

Summary Chart

on the facing page to assist you in

isolating to the failing FRU.

Failure Isolation

The tape resident diagnostics provide failure isolation.

These diagnostics are integrated into the MAPs and are

called MDls. The

MDls locate failing FRUs associated

with the printer, the internal tape unit, the 5106 Auxiliary

Tape Unit, and Communications/Serial

I/O features.

3-74

Utilities

Utilities are contained in the ROS resident diagnostics.

They are used

to display and alter read/write storage, to

branch, to copy tape to read/write storage, and to copy

read/write storage to tape. These diagnostics are not

covered in this guide; refer

to

ROS Resident Programs

and

Tests in this section.

DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY CHART

The Diagnostic Summary Chart shows the diagnostics,

the areas tested, the operating instructions, and the

normal sequence

of use. The chart does not show all of

the diagnostic capabilities, just those primarily used for

failure isolation. When reviewing the chart, note how

the diagnostics use the

building block concept.

That is,

they begin by testing the basic machine functions and

then proceed until they have tested the most

sophisticated functions.

The bring up diagnostic does not loop automatically;

therefore, four

of its tests are repeated as ROS resident

diagnostics

CMD 2, 3, 4, and 5.

Looping on a MOl allows repetitive testing of a

complete device. Failures during looping cause a branch

to a subsection of the M DI that checks a smaller area of

the device. You can loop on subsections of the MOl to

further isolate the failure. However, it is important to

start with one of the displayed OCP2 options because

these tests are sequence sensitive.

DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY CHART

(/

Tests

Bus Bit In

Op Code Test

R/W Storage

Interrupt 1, 2, 3

Device Address

Bus Out

Stuck

Key

Storage (0600

to end)

ROS

Content and CRC

ROS Address Read Back

Bring Up Complete

( Power On

)I-------t.~

+

-4-------1., ____ _

BRING UP DIAGNOSTICS

Halt Indicator

Blank

A

A B

A B C

A B C

D

A B C D E

A B C

D E F

A B C D E

F

G

A B C D E

F

G H

A B C D E F G H I

A B C D E

F

G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J K

Area Tested

G2, Power, Display

F2

F2, G2

E2

C2,C4,D2,D4,E2,F2

E2, F2,

J2

F2

F2, Keyboard

K2 through N4

C2,C4,D2,D4,E2

E2

H2,H4

(

OR--------------------------------------------~

DCP

1

Diagnostic Mode

I

+

Load DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode:

-

-

-

Hold CMD and press HOLD

Hold CMD and press -(minus)

Hold CMD

*

or X (multiply)

APl/BASIC

Normal machine

operation

To run CMD 0, 1,2, 3, 4, or

5:

-

-

-

Press C

Hold CMD and press the appropriate test number (0, 1,2,3,4, or

5)

Press EXECUTE

Area Tested

Tape Read

Tape Read

Op Code Loop

ROS Read CRC Loop

ROS Address Loop

R/W Storage

Internal tape unit without tape motion

Internal tape unit with tape motion

F2, G2

C2,C4,D2,D4,E2

E2

K2 through N4

Test

CMD 0 -

CMD

1 -

CMD 2 -

CMD 3 -

CMD 4 -

CMD

5 -

I

OR----------------------------------------------------------J

DCP2

+

Load DCP 1 Diagnostic Model as described above.

Run CMD 0 or 1 as described above.

Miscellaneous In

structions:

(

Press ATTN ( 1 time)

=

MDI Options

DCP 2

is now loaded. Select MD1 from the menu via the

2 times)

=

DCP 2 Menu Press ATTN (

Press ATTN (

instructions on

the display.

3 times)

=

DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode

y

I Instructions

Loop On MD

=

Refer to Loop on

I

MDI 800 -Printer -Refer to MDI 800 in this section.J

MDI in this

section

,

L

I

MOl -

,Ir

~

l

MDI -820, Communications and Serial I/O -Refer to MDI 820 in this section.

I

MDI -840, Auxiliary Tape Unit -Refer to MDI 840 in this section.J

860, Tape Write, Internal and Auxiliary -Refer to MOl 860 in this section.

I

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-75

TROUBLESHOOTING INTERMITTENT FAILURES

• Have the customer record as much information as

possible when the failure occurs.

How to Use This Guide

How often does the machine fail?

Because this is a guide instead· of a MAP, you must

Does the failure occur during one or many jobs

or

make. many decisions based on the information available

programs?

and the frequency

of the failure. The OR circles on the

Failure Isolation Chart in this section indicate

that type

Does the failure occur in BASIC, APL,

or both?

of situation.

Does the failure occur

at a particular time, such as

when the machine is first powered up or after it is

Recommendations on Failure Information

warmed up?

The following recommendations are given to assist you

Is the system configuration always the same or are

in obtaining failure information. Their order

of

other devices attached when the failure occurs?

presentation has no significance.

• Record any information on the previous items and

• Determine the customer error code

if possible. An

record any fixes in the space provided.

error code is normally more factual that the

operator's failure description. The descriptions of the

Notes

customer error codes are in

the

BASIC Reference

Manual,

SA21-9217, Appendix B and in the

APL

Reference Manual,

SA21-9212, Chapter 11. Refer to

Error Codes in this section for error codes below 100.

Use these error code descriptions

to aid you in

deciding which diagnostics

or MDls torun.

If the failure appears to be a printer or a tape

problem, record the status byte information. See

Printer Status Bytes Bit Descriptions

or Tape

Status

."

'

...

/

Byte Bit Descriptions

under

Troubleshooting

Intermittent Failures

in this section. This information

will help you

to isolate the failure and to determine

which

MOl to run.

"

,

,/

'

3-76

(

Service Hints

• Try to force the failure when running diagnostics by:

Vibrating the

machine/ cards/ connections.

Raising the machine temperature (unplug the

blower).

CAUTION

00 not exceed 20 minutes.

Lowering the machine temperature (use a circuit

coolant).

• Machine power must

be off when removing the

read/write storage cards (K2 through N2). All other

cards can be removed

with power on.

• You

can remove the following cards/devices if they

are not part

of the failing operation or when trying to

isolate to a failing operation:

A2 -

I/O Driver

B2 -Communications and serial I/O

APL cards C2, 02, 04, H4 if the failure is in

BASIC

BASIC card C4

if the failure is in APL

Read/write storage cards above 16K

5103 Printer

1506 Auxiliary Tape Unit

• You

can swap either the parts of the tape units

(internal and auxiliary) or the complete tape units

(physically or electrically). To swap electrically, swap

the cable in the Z2 socket

of the 5100 A1 board

(228) with the cable in socket B4

of the Auxiliary

Tape Unit (580). The internal tape unit address is

now E40 and the Auxiliary Tape Unit address is E80.

• To loop CMO

0:

Load and run CMO 0 until the first stop

Insert diagnostic cartridge

Hold CMO and press ATTN

Press A

Enter: 368C2B04

Press SPACE bar

Press A

Enter: 2B5831

BO

Press SPACE bar

Enter: BR2B04

Press

EXECUTE

Tape Status Byte Bit Description -Storage Address

OOSF

Bit O-End

of

Tape (EaT):

Indicates that anyone of six

holes in the tape (three at the beginning and three at the

end) generated

EOT status.

Bit

1-No

Device Address

E

Response:

Indicates that

status bit 1 was not active.

Bit

2-

Tape Running:

Indicates that the forward or

reverse select magnets were selected.

Bit 3-Cartridge in Place:

Indicates that the cartridge in

place switch is active.

Bit 4-Erase On:

Indicates that either channel 1 or

channel 0 erase current was on.

Bit 5-LED and Erase OK:

Indicates that the EOT and

BOT

LEOs were conducting and that the erase coils did

not have

an open circuit.

Bit 6-File Protected:

Indicates that the file protect

switch was made.

Bit 7-No

Beginning of

Tape

(1

=

No

BOT):

Indicates

that none of the top five holes in the tape generated

BOT status.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-77

J

:

Printer Status Bytes Bit Descriptions

Status Byte

A

(RAL2)

Bit O-Print Emitter Latch

3: Monitors the printer error

conditions and times the print wire firing.

Bit 1-Print Emitter Latch

2: Monitors the

printe~

error

condition and times the print wire firing.

Bit 2-Print Emitter Latch

1: Monitors the printer error

condition and times the print wire firing.

Bit

3 -

Wire Check or

Not

Ready:

Signals the adapter

that a print wire magnet was energized

for more than

1.6 ms when printing or 3.0 ms when not printing.

Bit 4-Forms Emitter

B: Determines when to stop.

Bit 5-Forms Emitter

A: Forms movement.

Bit

6-Not

End

of

Forms:

Indicates the presence of

forms. This signal is active when forms are within two

inches

(50.8

mm) of the print line.

Bit

7 -

Left Margin:

Used as a reference to position the

print head.

Status Byte B (RBL2)

Bit O-Print Motor Latch

B (0

=

not

B):

Provides

controls

for the print head stepper motor.

Bit 1-Print Motor Latch

A (0

=

not

A):

Provides

controls

for the print head stepper motor.

Bit 2-Print Emitter Interrupt:

Gen~rates

an 'interrupt

request 2' when print emitters are activated by the

microprogram.

3-78

Bit

3 -

Not Ready Interrupt:

Is

caUl~ed

by the printer

adapter sensing a

not ready condition from the printer.

Bit 4-Forms Motor Latch

B (0

=

not

B):

Provides

controls

for the forms feed stepper motor.

Bit 5-Forms Motor Latch

A (0

=

not

A):

Provides

controls

for the forms feed stepper motor.

Bit 6-Forms Control Interrupt:

Generates an 'interrupt

request

2' by changing conditions from the forms

control emitter.

Bit

7-

Timer Interrupt:

Indicates that the timer

interrupt controls the speed

of the print head stepper

motor.

!

Failure Isolation Chart

Start

For intermittent process

checks, refer

to

page

4-14

Review the

Customer

E"or Code Descriptions

in BASIC reference

N manual, Appendix B, and

>...;.;.-----!APL

reference

manual,

Chapter 11 to help you

determine the possibility

of an operator error.

Review the

Customer

Error Code Descriptions

in this section to help

you determine which I/O

device to test.

If

in doubt.

test all devices.

Review problem with

the operator

Run DCP "

CMD2.3.4.5

Use the

Bring Up

Diagnostic

chart in this

------------------------------------,

Start MAP 200

300

400

420

500

510

600

700

810

830

850

900

section to aid you in

card swapping

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Tape read

Bring up

Process check

Note:

MAP

organization

always

starts

with MAP 200.

Display

TV monitor

Keyboard

Po",",r

Printer

Communication,

SIO

Auxiliary tape

Machine check out

----------1

r------

'

-----,

I

MOl 890 in this section. I

I I

....

----------

.....

I

I MOl 890. Refer to :

I

~------------_4--------------~------~------~------------_4----------------~---------J

(:

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide

3-79

Language Support Troubleshooting Guide 5100 Termination Problem

Process check and/or halts might be caused by a

BASIC Diagnostic Tools

defective printer adapter card in the 5103 printer.

• List Print -Prints the user program (if a printer is

attached).

Run Trace, Print -Produces a printed trace of the

steps

as they are executed.

5100

5106.

• Pause -A pause statement inserted in a program

which allows you

to stop execution of the program in

order

to look at variables.

5103

or

Terminator

Run Step -Allows you to step through a customer

; ;'

program.

When a total system is connected, the termination is

APL Diagnostic Tools

done by the printer adapter card in the 5103 printer.

• )FNS -Lists names of user defined functions.

When only the auxiliary drive (5106) is connected, the

termination is done by the terminator assembly attached

• )VARS -Lists the variables.

to the rear of the 5106. Be sure the terminator is

mounted in the

I/O connector and not in the storage

• V

(user defined function name)

[0] -

Lists the

location.

function.

• T 6 (user defined function name) + (step numbers

CRT Centering Problem

separated by a space) -Results

in a trace of the

specified steps.

If you are not able to center the CRT after installing a

new

J2 card on an old level machine, check the tub file

T6 (user defined function name) +10 -Results in a

for subcards and FBM5572571 for the 64K machines.

trace

of the first 10 steps.

If the

B/M

5572571 is not installed, order it from

Mechanicsburg.

T6 (user defined function name) +60 -Turns trace

off.

• 56 (user defined function name) + 3 5 -Results in a

stop before statement 3 and before statement

5.

You may also do the following to help debug a

program:

• Insert statements

• Change statements

• Delete statements

• Insert print statements to print variables

• Break complex statement into several shorter

statements

./

3-80

c:

(

Bring Up Diagnostic

If the diagnostic fails often enough to use the MAPs, go to

MAP 200. Try to make the machine fail in order to answer

the MAP questions. Also review the MAP paths

to aid you

in determining which part

to swap.

If the diagnostic seldom fails, use the following chart to

help determine which part to swap.

BRING UP DIAGNOSTICS

Tests Halt Indicator

Blank

A

A B

ABC

ABC D

ABC

D E

ABC D E F

ABC D E F G

ABC D E F G H

ABC

D E F G H I

A B C D E F G H I

J

ABC D E F G H I

J

K

Area Tested

G2, Power, Display

F2

F2, G2

E2

C2,C4,D2,D4, E2,F2

E2, F2,J2

F2

F2, Keyboard

K2 through N4

C2,C4,D2,D4,E2

E2

H2,H4

f

Bus Bit In

Op Code Test

R/W Storage

Interrupt 1, 2, 3

Device Address

Bus Out

Stuck Key

Storage (0600 to end)

ROS Content

1

and CRC

ROS Address Read Back

Bring Up Complete

1

The sequence number displayed during this test identifies the card tested.

Sequence Number

10,11,12,13,14,15

16,17,18

20,21,22,23,24

25,26,27,28,29

2A,2B,2C,2D,2E,2F

ROS Card

C4 (BASIC ROS)

E2 (ROS Adapter)

D2 (APL

ROS 1)

D4 (APL ROS 2)

C2 (APL ROS 3)

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-81

Intermittent Process Check

Use the following procedure to help you find the cause

of intermittent process checks:

1. Before resetting the

PROCESS CHECK light, refer

to

Error Checking

in Section 4 of this manual. This

provides a list

of lines you may probe to help

isolate the process check error to a card or a

device.

Use the following probe points and card

references, along

with the 5100 logic diagrams

and MAPs

to isolate the process check error:

• Rd data error (-G2-S08) -This is a parity error

on data in the read data register of the

controller. Cards that can cause this error are:

the controller

(G2) card; the display (J2) card;

the BASIC,

I/O, and diagnostic (H2) cards: the

read/write storage (K2,

K4, L2, L4, M2, M4,

N2, and

N4) cards; and the APL supervisor (H4)

card. A parity error, resulting in

an Rd data

error, occurs

if there is an attempt to read from

a read/write storage address

for which the

read/write storage cards

are not installed. This

means that

if less than 64K of read/write

storage is installed,

an error in the

microprogram can cause a process check.

• Bus

in error (+G2-U09) -This error is a parity

check

on bus in. Cards that can cause this

error

are the controller (G2) card; the base I/O

(F2) card; the ROS adapter (E2) card; the

expansion feature (B2) card; and the

I/O cable

driver (A2) card.

In addition, this error can be

caused by the following

I/O devices: keyboard,

tape unit, printer, or Auxiliary Tape Unit.

To determine the device address, probe the

following address line points and refer

to the

following chart:

XO

F2-007

X1 F2-B07

X2

F2-009

X3 F2-002

YO

F2-B09

Y1 F2-01O

Y2

F2-B10

Y3

F2-011

Note: An active line will

have a + voltage level.

3-82

Device

Address

Address Lines Device Name

o

XOYO

Controller G2

XOY1

Nonexecutable

ROS

(BASIC C4 and APL

ROS C2, 02, 04)

2

XOY2 Not assigned

3

XOY3

Not assigned

4

X1YO

Keyboard and the

APL-BASIC switch

5

X1Y1

Printer

6

X1Y2

Not assigned

7

X1Y3

Not assigned

r

8

X2YO

Expansion feature

9

X2Y1

Not assigned

10

X2Y2

Not assigned

11

X2Y3

Not assigned

12 X3YO Not assigned

13

X3Y1

Not assigned

14

X3Y2

Tape units

15

X3Y3

All

I/O

• +Address check (F2-B13) -This is a device

address check on the base

I/O (F2) card. The

base

I/O (F2) card and the controller (G2) card

can cause this error.

• +Address check,

ROS adapter (E2-010) -The

device addresses are checked at the

ROS

adapter (E2) card and the error can be probed

there.

• +Address check, expansion feature (B2·J13) -

The device addresses are checked at the

expansion feature (B2) card and the error can

be probed there.

• +Address check, printer (A2-P12) -The device

addresses are checked at the printer adapter

card and the error can be probed there.

/

• +Address check, auxiliary tape (C1-P05) -The

device addresses are checked at the auxiliary

tape adapter card and the error can be probed

there.

Only one

of the device address lines XO, X1, X2,

i

or X3, and only one

of the device address lines,

YO, Y1, Y2, or Y3 will be up when a device is

addressed. The device address check, occurs

when any odd number

of the eight lines is up

when a device is addressed.

(

(

(

(

('

(~

• +Bus out parity check (F2-D13) -This is a

parity check or bus out on the base

I/O (F2)

card. Either the controller (G2) card or the base

I/O (F2) card can cause this error.

• +Bus out parity check,

ROS adapter (E2-B 11) -

The parity

of bus out is tested on the ROS

adapter (E2) card and the error can be probed

there.

• +Bus out parity check, expansion feature

(B2-M02) -The parity

of bus out is tested on

the expansion feature (B2) card and the error

can

be probed there.

• +Bus out parity check, printer (A2-P12) -The

parity of bus out is tested on the printer

adapter card and the error

can be probed there.

• +Bus out parity check, auxiliary tape (C1-P04) -

The parity of bus out is tested on the auxiliary

tape adapter card and the error can be probed

there.

2. Reseat all cards and cables.

3.

Check voltages.

4.

Check the customers AC ground.

5.

Check the fan(5).

Tape

Use the following procedure to help you find the cause

of intermittent tape errors:

1.

Any cartridges that were written before a problem

was resolved on the tape drive, can still cause

problems.

2.

Check the cartridge stops (see 224).

3.

Perform the Tape Select Magnet Service Check

(see 222).

4.

Clean the tape head with isopropyl alcohol and a

lint free tissue. Check the head adjustment (see

231). Replace the head if it

is worn.

5.

Clean the spindle assembly and the drive rolls with

isopropyl alcohol and a lint free tissue.

6.

Reset all the cables and the cards in the tape unit.

7.

Check

to be sure the tape unit does not face into

a strong light

or the sun.

8. Make sure the brake arms are white and not black.

AC Power Grounding Checks

To check for proper AC power receptacle grounding,

measure the AC voltages at the location shown

in the

following figure. This check does not detect a poor

quality ground (high resistance

to earth).

GrOUndrn°

~

~.

~

~Neutral

_

Hot

Front View

If you suspect a line problem you can:

1.

Place an isolation transformer between the line

and the 5100 computer.

2.

Inspect the AC box to be sure the wires do not

cross. The line side and load side wires should

not cross

as this can induce line spikes in the load

side wires.

3.

Check the AC box capacitors to ensure they are

not twisted and their wires

are not crossed.

4.

Check

for a machine or a device in the same

room, on the same line, or anywhere nearby

that

can induce conductive or inductive noise.

The voltage between neutral and ground should be less

than 2 volts AC.

The voltage between neutral

and hot should be

approximately 110 Vac

to 120 Vac. Also, the voltage

between ground and hot should

be approximately 110

Vac to 120 Vac.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-33

Check that all frame ground connections are clean and

tight in all devices on the system. Frame grounding is

indicated either by a braided cable or a green and yellow

wire.

5100 ground locations:

Bottom cover. center right side

CRT mounting screen and frame

Power supply fan

motor

Raceway

Power switch

AC power box

Tape unit motor

AC capacitor

in tape unit

TV monitor plug

5103 ground locations:

Left

front corner

Right

front corner

AC line cord

Flat cable shield clamp

Left rear

of forms tractor

5106 ground locations:

Tape unit motor

AC capacitor

Cooling fan

Power switch

AC line cord

A1 board

Flat cable shield clamp

AC

Power Considerations

Checking for proper AC line voltage is a task that you

are familiar with. However. other aspects

of the AC

power source are also very important. The AC line

voltage should not vary by more than

±1 0 % except for

500 ms transients of +15% to -18%.

One type of AC power disturbance becoming more

frequent is fractional phase loss. This is a result

of

phase controlled SCRs controlling motors. ovens. or

other loads. These devices turn on their loads during

each phase and deplete the sine wave

of energy.

AC

Power Terms

Current Carrying Ground:

This is

t~e

neutral line that is

connected

to the neutral bus.

3-84

Neutral Bus:

This bus bar is inside the power panel.

The other neutral buses should be tied

to this bus. The

neutral bus should be tied

to the ground bus only at the

main distribution panel.

Main Distribution Panel:

This is the first power panel

inside

of the customer's building. This panel is fed

directly from the power company lines. The ground bus

in this panel is serviced by the service entrance ground.

Ground Bus:

This bus bar is in the power panel. The

ground wire

for the power source of the 5100. along

with a wire into the panel from an approved earth

ground source. should connect to this bar.

Earth Ground:

The definition depends upon local

electrical building codes. Usually.

an earth ground is

supplied in two forms:

1.

A metal pipe running into the earth and containing

running water. Stagnant water or sump lines are

not good earth ground sources. nor are lines

broken by nonmetal connections.

2.

A metal stake driven into the ground. The length

of the stake and the depth to which it must be

driven into the ground depend on local codes.

Noncurrent Carrying Ground:

This is the line from the

ground

in the receptacle to the ground bus.

(

(

:{

AC Power Distribution in a Typical Commercial Building

Main

Distribution

Panel

I

_I

I

Transformer

Neutral

I

I

I

oav

Center _

Bus

............

~

.

.......

1"

Tap

l-

I

-~

Ground~

Bus

I

Power

Panel

A

I

I

~

These buses must be tied

to an

approved ground source.

They

These buses

Neutral

can be tied through wire

I

t

.. 3

I

must not be

Bus "'-.

but, if possible, a ground source

0

tied

together

should

o

be

supplied through wire

Ground.,

also.

~

in the power

panel.

Bus

It

-

I

I

r--........

I

I

I

I

B

Gro~nd

'.~

/' Neutral

Hot ..

~

I

U

~

U

~

UI~/--~----------------;-~

120 Vac Receptacle

Front View

To Other

120 Vac

Circuits

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-85

MOl 800 Printer Diagnostics

The following chart shows the relationsip of MOl 800

and MOls 801 through 805. MOl 800 tests the entire

printer. When MOl 800 detects a failing condition,

it

halts and displays the test routine that failed. MOl 800

isolates certain failures as shown on the chart

or

transfers to one of the other MOls shown for further

failure isolation. MOls 801 through 805 can be looped

by returning

to the MOl options and following the

instructions on the display.

801

-

(

-

End of forms

Enter

)

-

No end of forms

Forms motion problems

MOl Printer

(8001

~

Tests: 5103 circuits and mechanics.

~

802

-Incorrect status

-Voltage checks

Analyzes

to:

A 1 A 1 voltage regulator and sense amp card

803

-Adapter card,

I/O cable and signals

B 1A 2 adapter card

-Carrier motion

-

Print head motion

Left margin

-Print

head retract

Print emitter pickup

Print emitter board

804 -Print

head interface

Power

t--

'----+

-Print emitter

805

-

Left margin

-

Left margin timing

-

Print problems

-Print quality

3-86

MOl 820 Communications/Serial I/O

This

MOl tests the communications/serial I/O features which

reside on

the B2 card. When this MOl detects a failing con·

dition, it halts and displays

the routine that failed. For

descriptions

of these routines, refer to the

Communications

Adapter/Seriall/O Adapter

and Diagnostic Routines.

MOl 840 Tape Read

This diagnostic has

two parts:

1.

2.

MOl 840 tests the tape unit without tape motion ..

MOl 844 tests the tape unit with tape motion.

(

MOl 820 Communications/Serial I/O

Tests: Communications/Serial I/O circuits

The chart on this page shows the relationship

of MOl 840

through MOl 847. Be sure to record the information in the

status bytes for at least the first failure in order to compare

status information with the

MOl routine causing the halt.

Refer to

the tape status byte information in this section.

MOls 840 and 844 cannot be looped together. To loop on

MOl 840, load MOl 840 and remove the tape cartridge be·

fore running

the MOL Go to the option menu to set up

the loop. To loop on

MOl 844, load and run MOl 844. Go

to

the option menu to set up the loop.

MOl 840 and 844 can be run for both the internal or the

5106 Auxiliary Tape units. However, a confusion factor

exists since

all references are to the 5106 Auxiliary Tape

unit. Also,

the MOl subsection has to be loaded from the

internal tape unit and might

be difficult to load depending

on

the frequency of the failure.

(

Analyzes

to:

Communications:

Timer interrupts

Data set ready

Clear

to send

Data through the communications circuits

Long space interrupts

Serial I/O:

Timer interrupts

Data set ready

Clear

to send

Data through the serial I/O circuits

(

Enter

841

-Cartridge in place

-

File protect

-LED, BOT,

EOT

MOl 840 Tape Read

Tests: Tape read without tape motion

Analyzes

to:

Status reset

-

842

-Erase

-Select magnets

--.

843

-

-

Interrupt

Data th rough tape control card

(

Interrupt

Read check

845

-Catridge

in place

-Read data

-Customer error codes 002·014

MOl 844 Tape Read

(

Tests: Tape read with tape motion

846 -

BOT

-EOT

-Tape speed

847 -Tape motion

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-87

MOl 860 Tape Write Diagnostic

This

MOl tests all the tape write functions of the internal and

the 5106 Auxiliary Tape units. It also analyzes all failures

except erase

as shown in the following chart. Be sure to

record the tape status on at least the first failure. Refer

to the tape status byte information in this section.

Enter

,I'"

MDI 860 Tape Write

Tests: Tape write head and circuits

Analyzes

to:

Velocity

Acceleration

861 -Analyzes

t~.

erase

Deceleration

Write/read back

Symmetry (See Note 1 )

Peak shift (See Note

2)

Read/write head azimuth (See Note 3)

Binds in customer cartridge (See Note 4)

Notes:

The following notes are for instructional purposes

c

o c

c

o

c

only. The drawings are

not meant to be scope pictures

as the diagnostics are designed to check the tolerances.

1. Symmetry -The bit cells are of equal duration. This is

a function of the tape read/write channel. The tape

velocity tested

OK in a previous routine.

Undistorted

,

I

Raw Data

I

:

':

I

1 I I

:

I

I

I

----1-,

I

r---,

I

I----J

I I :

Clock

Clock Clock

I

tJ

,..--1.,

;

t

J

r-----'

LJ

r---

I

LJ

Peak Shifted

LJ

I I

I

1

Raw Data

I

Raw Data

--.--

3. Azimuth -The physical angular alignment of the

Bit Cell

read/write head gap with the recorded transitions on

the tape. It

is similar to skew, but due to recording

data serial

by bit and by character (as apposed to

parallel recording on 7 and 9 track tape) it is referred

'..

/

to

as azimuth.

2. Peak Shift -The timing shift of the analog signal peaks

4. Binds

in customer cartridge -All tape write tests

is due to the bit pattern and to the tape to read/write head

must run satisfactorily with

the diagnostic cartridge

relationship. This

is a function of reading tape.

prior

to inserting the customers cartridge.

3-88

MOl 890 DIAGNOSTIC SECTIONS

MOl 890 allows you

to select the same routines as used in

the other MOls. In other words, routine PT03 in MOl

890

is the same as PT03 in MOl 800. However, the

routines in MOl 890 do

not halt or branch when sensing

a failing condition. The main advantage of MOl 890 is

that it allows you to select individual MOl sections which

is especially useful when scoping intermittent failures.

(

(

Enter

l

891

-

Tap'e write routines. These are the same

routines

as MOls 840, 841,843,844,

MOl 890 Diagnostic Section

~

845,846, and 847.

Provides selection of routines for I/O

devices.

892

-

5103 J>rinter routines. These are the same

routines

as MOl 800,801,802,803,804,

and 805.

893

-

Tape read routines. These are the same

routines

as MOl 860 and 861.

~

894

-

Communications/Serial I/O routines. These

are the same routines

as those in MOl 820.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-89

5100 SYMPTOM INDEX

(

,

Symptom

Intermittent process checks with all

I/O devices attached.

Isolation Aid

Remove all the I/O devices to see if

the problem still occurs.

Fix

Replace the printer adapter card.

""

(

'",--/

Intermittent process checks and bring Check the power cable plug (YU1) on Reform the clamp holding Y1.

up failures. the A 1 board. The clamp might be

formed wrong; this allows the plug to

fall out.

Process check on power up. Suspect the K2 storage card. Swap Replace the K2 card.

the K2 card with another storage card

to verify this.

Go to DISPLAY REGISTERS. If ROLO Replace the G2 card.

,

j

Bring up failure on power up.

is 0006, the failure is in the bring up

1

diagnostic.

Fails to power up intermittently. Fans None. Replace the POWER ON/POWER

run but there is no voltage

to A 1

OFF switch.

board.

Fails

to power up within five seconds Remove the AC fan motor plug and If the machine powers up, suspect

after power down (30

to 90 seconds). the AC tape motor plug at the AC the wiring of the AC box.

box. Then power up.

Blows card and land patterns on A 1 Check the TV monitor line cord wiring The customer must have the TV

board after installing a

TV monitor. for an error causing chassis to be hot monitor wiring corrected.

(110 AC).

Keyboard locks with flashing cursor. Check the last key pressed and verify

Clean or replace the failing flyplate

that it operates. Press the RESTART and / or key module.

key

to isolate the failing key.

Key is pressed and wrong character is

None.

Replace the ROS card, storage card,

displayed. or display card.

Unsteady display. Switch

to DISPLAY REGISTERS. Repair the connections on the

Check the connections on the

brightness control.

brightness control.

No display and registers are

not Remove the printer from the system. Replace the printer adapter card.

running.

Unable to clear messages from

None (operator error). Do not use undefined function keys or

display line 15 when errors occur

copy display

without a printer

during an input statement. attached to the system.

Display character distortion. Adjusting the CRT has little or no Replace the J2 card.

effect.

TV monitor has wavy or distorted 5100 display is OK. Uncrimp the cable connection

to the

characters.

TV monitor.

166 APL halts in BASIC. The problem shows up in new

Do not use new unmarked tapes

as

unmarked tapes copied by the tape

output

for the tape copy program.

copy program.

Mark the new tapes

with at least one

file before using.

3-90

,--/,

/

/

"

Symptom

003 through 010 intermittent errors.

003 and 004 errors when marking

new tapes.

003, 004, and 007 errors.

(

003, 004, 007 and 008 errors.

004 and 007 errors on diagnostics

and customer jobs.

004 and 007 errors.

004,005, 006, 007, and 008 errors.

004, 007, and 008 errors.

007 errors.

Isolation Aid

Fix

Check the customer grounding and Check to see if customer is using an

the 5100 grounding.

ungrounded extension cord.

None.

Replace the LED/PTX assembly.

Check

for bad solder connections at

Replace

or repair the cables and verify

paddle cards and cable connectors.

that all connections are good.

Also check

for strands of wire

shorting

to pins.

None.

Replace the H2 card.

Moving the cable that goes to the Replace the CRT.

CRT away from the tape control card

causes the problem

to disappear.

Loose read/write head. Replace the read/write head.

The customer usually sees only 005 Adjust tape microswitches for a

errors, but

can create 007 errors

clearance

of 0.001 inches (0.025 mm)

unknowingly.

to 0.003 inches (0.076). Adjust for

maximum overtravel.

Locking wheels are not centered or

Adjust the locking wheels (see 225)

seated properly in the base.

and check the adjustment by pulling

the cartridge out about

1/8 inch (3

mm) and releasing it. The cartridge

should seat

in the tape unit.

Excessive retries.

Check the select magnet and the

jackshaft adjustments.

(See 222 and

223.)

The motor locks up or does not move Replace the motor.

the tape properly.

The tape rubs against the cartridge

Reposition the tape on the spools by

base plate or plastic top.

doing a )LlB

or UTIL; then mark a file

to the end of tape and do a rewind.

Extra bytes are written

in the data

Check out the tape by doing a )LlB or

record filed on the diagnostic tape

UTIL on the diagnostic tape cartridge.

cartridge during a CMD 0 or CMD

1. If this works, load the failing file

using the CMD 8 function.

If there is an error in the data, an 007

error will be displayed. You

can

rebuild the damaged file using a

known good tape and CMD 8 and

CMD 9 procedures.

The display is not blanked during tape

IN PROCESS and PROCESS CHECK

operations. leads are swapped.

(See 210 for

correct wiring).

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-91

Symptom

007 and 008 errors.

Isolation Aid

Fix

The spindle is glazed from improper Clean the spindle and drive rolls using

contact pressure

between the spindle isopropyl alcohol.

and· the tape cartridge. This causes

retries and tape errors.

The customer cannot copy a complete

tape

to another tape or complains

that tapes have different storage

capacity.

Spindle or jacks haft bearings.

Check

for proper wiring of the I/O

device.

All tapes have 204K bytes storage

capacity.

New files requireO.5K bytes

for each file header. This must be

considered when you set up

the files.

Replace as required.

Wire the I/O device to provide' data

terminal ready'

if the 5100 is acting

as a modem. If the device is acting

as a terminal, wire the I/O device to

provide 'data set ready'.

Check the brake arms

to ensure they

are white.

010 and 012 errors.

Noisy tape drives.

SIO fails to run the I/O device.

004 error. Tape does not move. Fails when

started after being inactive

for some

time.

012 error.

007. error

with printer attached.

007 error.

Check

to see if the tape unit is facing Prevent direct sunlight from entering

a window. the tape drive opening.

Disconnect the 5103 printer to

eliminate the error.

Find out if the tape cartridge was in!

the tape drive when the power was

turned on or off.

Replace the G2 card.

Do not power the 5100 on

or off with

the tape cartridge in the drive.

Check jumper J2G07

to ground.

In BASIC, rows

of 1's, 3's, 5's, or 9's None.

appear. In APL,

CRT is blank.

Tape binds when being inserted or

does not seat properly.

004, 007 tape· errors.

Pr()cessor checks or printer errors

with the 5106 attached.

Processor check on 860.

Diagnostic tape is damaged

or 007

error occurs when diagnostic tape is

run.

Do the stop adjustments and ensure

The

window on the tape cartridge

should have some clearance between

the outer edge

of the stop is parallel

the deflector and the right stop.

to the edge of the tape unit upright.

Find out

if the operator is continuing

to key when the tape is running.

Do not key while the tape is running.

See

if BVD fails E-5. Disconnect the

Repair the defective

I/O connector in

5103 and 5106.

the 5106.

Swap storage cards

to stop error on Replace G2 card.

Do not put the diagnostic tape

cartridge

in the tape drive when

performing

CMDO or CMD1 or the

tape will be destroyed.

Check jumpers from A 1 J2G07

to

A1J2P08 and from A1G2S07 to

A1G2S09.

/

806.

None.

Processor checks occur on power up, Check jumpers on the A 1 board.

but· restart works OK.

,

3-92

c

(

(

(

Symptom

Isolation Aid

Fix

Intermittent tape errors 004, 007, and None.

Adjust the select magnets

for correct

OOS.

air gap.

A 152 error did not occur when

Check to see

if failure occurs only on Alter storage size to 6 bytes less than

loading a file larger than

64K bytes. 64K machines. 64K when trying to load a file larger

than 64K.

Intermittent processor checks

from

Usually fails when keying fast.

Replace

F2 card.

the keyboard.

Blank CRT. None.

Check

that the CRT connector is

plugged in properly. The end

of the

cable

that has 5 wires must be

toward the

front of the 5100.

Intermittent processor checks.

Meter the process check

for a '+RDR' Replace the CRT.

error.

Intermittent processor checks on halt

Unplug the fan (for no more than 15

Replace

E2 card.

11S with bring up diagnostics.

minutes)

to cause a solid failure.

003 and 004 tape errors.

Check the status byte in location

Correct defective

read/write head.

OOSF. The byte will be 35 for normal

and

39 with this error.

On

the 5100 model C, the character Failure still occurs when you enter

Replace C2 card.

entered does not match the character characters

with about 15 to 20

keyed. seconds' delay between strokes.

Dropping power.

Plug the power supply into another

Replace POWER

ON/OFF switch.

5100

to be sure it works.

Noisy tape drives.

Fails usually in one direction.

Replace jackshaft.

Keyboard locks up intermittently.

None.

Replace CRT.

Power up fails intermittently.

Switch J 1 and

J2 plugs.

Replace the POWER

ON/OFF switch.

Processor checks on power up.

None.

Check

Y1 cable plugging.

Fading

CRT.

None.

Replace G2 card.

No power to A 1 board.

Check the AC voltage on the output

Replace the AC line filter.

of the line filter.

Print plot stops intermittently.

None.

Replace G2 card.

004 and 007 errors.

None.

Replace internal

or external cable.

Tape errors. None. Replace

CRT.

Characters on the CRT are different

Characters at the

top left corner of Replace F2 and J2 cards.

sizes.

the CRT are larger than those at the

bottom right corner.

Intermittent '+RDR' processor checks. The error becomes solid when you Replace

F2 card.

unplug the fan

for 15 minutes or less.

CRT display jitters. Check the connectors on the

Replace

J2 card or the CRT.

brightness control potentiometer.

Character entered does

not match the None.

Replace defective display, storage,

or

character on the CRT.

ROS card.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-93

5100 SERVICE TIPS

• You can either swap the parts

of the internal and

auxiliary tape units, or you can physically

or

DANGER

electrically swap the complete tape units. To swap

Do not touch or attempt to remove the coax cable

electrically, swap the cable in the Z2 socket

of the

while the TV monitor is plugged into

an AC outlet.

5100

A1 board with the cable socket in socket B4 of

There is the possibility

of 110 volts being carried on

the Auxiliary Tape Unit. The internal tape unit

the coax BNC connector and the cable shield,

if the

address is

now

E40

(BASIC) or 002 (APL).

TV monitor has not been properly modified by the

user. This voltage could also appear on the frame

of

the 5100.

Tape File Recovery

This procedure can be used

to recover tape files before

and after a defective file (CRCin header). To identify a

defective file, do a UTIL or )UB

of the cartridge starting

with file 1.

General

Tips

Use the following example: Files 1 through 4 are good,

• Try to force the failure when running diagnostics by:

file 5

is defective (CRC in header), files 6 through 10 are

Vibrating the machine/cards/connections.

good. By using the normal load and save commands,

Raising the machine temperature (unplug the

you

can save files 1 through 4. When file 5 is reached

blower).

(defective file). remove the cartridge and manually move

the tape forward past a load

of the file 6, and repeat

CAUTION

the load and save operations

for fields 6 through 10.

Do not exceed 20 minutes.

(Be sure to save to a different tape and mark as

required.) By marking file 4 on the defective tape one K

larger than

it was, you can reuse the tape. All files past

file 3 are

now lost.

Lowering the machine temperature (use a circuit

coolant).

• Machine power switch must be down (off) when you

remove the

read/write storage cards (K2, K4, L2, L4,

M2, M4, N2, N4). All other cards can be removed

with power switch up (on).

• You can remove the following cards/devices

if they

are

not part of the failing operation or when you are

trying

to isolate to a failing operation:

A2-1

/0 cable driver card

B2-Communications card

C2-Asynchronous communication/serial

I/O card

APL cards

(C2, 02, 04, H4) if the failure is in

BASIC

-BASICcard

C4 if the failure is in APL

Read/write storage cards (K2, K4, L2, L4, M2,

M4, N2, N4)

5103 Printer

5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit

3-94

r

',,-

j

(

(

(

(

(

Tape Mark

This procedure allows you to remark (initialize) a tape if

file 1 is defective (CRC in header). Be sure to recover all

files after file 1 before using this procedure. Recover all

data possible before doing this. Use the file recovery

procedure first.

1.

Rewind the tape and do a UTIL or )LlB

to ensure

file 1 is defective.

2.

Rewind the tape to the loed point (single hole in

tape).

3.

Remove the tape and wind the load point hole

onto the right reel.

4.

Jumper U10 to U08 on the back of the tape unit

(control card pin side) (227).

5. Insert the tape and with a thin screw driver reach

in from the right side

of the tape unit and push

the jackshaft to the left. This causes the tape

to

move forward. Move the tape forward about six

inches.

S.

Release the jackshaft.

7.

Remove the jumper.

8.

Rewind the tape.

9.

Mark the tape starting in file 1.

Freelanee Aids

Isolation aids that can be used when freelancing:

1. Disconnect one or both external I/O devices.

CAUTION

The last cabled I/O device must have a terminator

or you will get proceS$ checks and bring-up

diagnostic errors. The 5103 has its own internal

terminator.

2. Remove all but 16K bytes of storage and

uSe

extra

cards

to isolate the problem.

3. Remove the A2 card to isolate the 5100 from the

external

I/O.

4. Remove the B2 card to isolate the 5100 from the

communications

and/or SID.

5. Disconnect the CRT connector if a display is not

needed.

6. All 5100 cards except read/write storage can be

pulled

with power on.

7. All pins except voltage pins can be tied down.

8. Check all voltages.

9. Disconnect the fan motor to heat the machine and

aggravate the failure.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 20 minutes of machine operation

without fan running and

COVl;lrs installed.

Intermittent FaillJres Troubleshooting Guide 3-95

Card and Board Jumpers

Failures on the 5100 which are hard

to analyze might be

associated with the jumper installed on the A 1 board,

the G2 card, or the

J2 card. In several cases, the

jumpers have been missing or loose.

When working with the A 1 board or its cards, be sure

that the jumpers are installed correctly.

If you are

experiencing any

of the following symptoms, check the

jumpers: (See 209 for the correct jumpering of the logic

cards.)

1. Process check on power up, but restart works

properly.

2. No display; will not restart; meaningless data on

the display.

3.

Single row of digits across the bottom of the

display,

or blank display.

4.

Unable to analyze process checks; or, more than

one type

of process check at the same time.

5.

Wrong characters printed on the printer or

displayed on the display.

3-96

Read/Write Head (007) Errors

The following

read/write head adjustment procedure

might decrease 007 tape errors:

1.

Remove the tape control card.

2.

Loosen the

read/write head.

3.

Position the

read/write head against the front and

left

of the mounting recess and tighten the

mounting screw (facing the

front of the machine).

4.

Make sure the read/write head grounding wire

clears the cartridge door when the cartridge

is

inserted.

5.

Clean the

read/write head with isopropyl alcohol

part 220020C and lint free tissue.

6.

Replace the tape control card and test the 5100

using the tape read test and MOl 860.

Intermittent Process Checks

If you are experiencing intermittent process checks on

the 5100 and cannot determine the type

or the cause,

see

Error Checking

in the

Theory

section. When an error

occurs, do not reset the machine. This will allow you

to

probe the failing line.

Dropping Records

If you are experiencing dropping records from files, or if

you are getting 009 or 152 errors, check the file to see

which recent changes were made and if the file is larger

than the available workspace. If you load a data file into

storage, get a 152 error, make changes or corrections

to

that file, and then save the file, all data beyond the

available storage will

be lost. To eliminate losing these

files, change or update the files under program control.

,/

(

(

(

Attachment of a TV Monitor A modified TV set must have isolation between the

primary line voltage and the frame and circuitry

of the

A standard TV set may be modified and used as a video

set. This can be accomplished by using

an isolation

monitor

for the 5100.

transformer between your outlet line voltage and the

voltage input

to the TV set. This transformer should be

Generally, modifying a standard TV set and using

it as a

permanently wired into the circuit. The new input power

video monitor yields less satisfactory results than using

plug must be a three-prong grounded plug with the

a regular video monitor. This is because the same level

ground connected

to the chassis of the TV set. This

of quality is not built into TV receivers as is found in

grounding circuit must be electrically connected

to the

monitor class units. For example, the contrast and

5100 grounding circuit.

resolution are not

as good on a modified TV receiver;

thus the image is

not as sharp and is usually more

Before the video input is connected

to anything, it

difficult

to read.

should be tested to verify that the connector's external

shell is at ground potential and that no line voltage is

However,

if a TV receiver is modified and used as a

present on either the external shell or the center

video monitor, the following procedure must be

conductor.

observed, or exposure

to a severe electric shock or

damage

to the 5100 may occur when the TV set is

It is the responsibility of the TV modifier to ensure that

connected

to the IBM 5100.

the input circuit meets the requirements

of the 5100

output and will not damage the 5100. IBM will not

modify the TV receiver.

Three-Prong

Isolation

TV

Grounded

Plug

Output

Transformer

Note:

If a TV receiver is modified for use as a video

monitor, IBM accepts no responsibility

for safety

precautions during conversion and hookup,

for damages

incurred

to the TV receiver or 5100, or for the quality of

the TV receiver as a video monitor.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-97

Monitor Video Out Service Check

Set up the scope as follows:

Use an x10probe

Connect channel 1 to A 1 K2B04

(+

monitor video)

Set these switches:

Sync -internal

Sweep -auto trigger

CHl volts/div -0.1 volts

Time/Div -10 p.s

Slope -(-) minus

Coupling -

D.C.

Note:

Be sure to ground the scope probe.

With the 5100 power switch set to ON and the

DISPLAY REGISTERS switch set

to DISPLAY

REGISTERS, you should

see the following pattern on

the scope:

B

A

1---.------'"

641-1

s

-----..,.1

Ground -------------------------------------------------------------------

A

=

1.0 volts minimum to ground

B

=

=

1.4 volts minimum to ground

C

2.25 volts minimum to ground

D

=

63.3

p. seconds for one sweep of

+

monitor video

The TV monitor, when connected, should provide a

75....1""..

termination load to the 5100 source ground. If

several monitors are to be used, they should be daisy

chained and the last monitor in the string terminated

with 75-,,-. In some cases the 5100 may overdrive the

TV

monitor. It may, therefore, be necessary for the

customer

to add a 75-"'-.attenuator to the back of the

5100.

3-98

"--

,/

PRINTER SYMPTOM INDEX

Symptom Isolation Aid

Fix

Resolder the connections or replace

the cable.

Process checks with the 5103 Printer Check the solder connections on the

or the 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit

I/O interface connectors.

attached

to the 5100.

(

Wavy print or 057 errors (vertical print The print head

might be touching the

Check

that the emitter board and

alignment). foam on the inside

of the cover.

pickup are adjusted properly. Remove

a small portion

of the foam if

necessary. If the print head is moved

manually, the characters will not line

up with the characters printed before

the interruption.

051,054, and 058 errors. Check the forms guide rack for proper Ground the forms guide rack. Be sure

grounding. the screw fastening the ground strap

to the forms guide is making good

contact.

None.

Check the bottom

of the printer for

two orange shipping bolts.

Check the screws on capacitors C 1

and

C2 to make sure they are tight.

Capacitors C1, C2, and C4 measure

OK with no power applied.

Carrier drive belt dirty.

Check

for missing +24 V and

+10.5 V.

Check

for print wires protruding

through the print head.

Errors occur when running MDI 800.

Replace the print emitter pickup card.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

Remove the orange shipping bolts

using the 5103 unpacking instructions.

Tighten all screws on these

capacitors.

Replace the C1 card. C1 breaks down

under power.

Clean or replace the belt.

(See the

5103

MIM.)

Replace transistor Q1 in the 51.03

Printer power supply. (See the 5103

MIM.)

Replace the ribbon.

Replace the print emitter pickup card.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

056 and 057 errors when running

MD1800.

Forms gear binds on the

top cover.

050

to 059 errors.

~

,1

051 errors when attempting to print.

056 and 057 errors.

Tighten the eccentric and/or print

Check print head and carrier

head.

assembly. Make sure the carrier is

mounted solidly

to the guide bars.

Also check the eccentric

to be sure it

is positioned properly.

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-99

Symptom

Intermittent 051 through 059 errors

and other intermittent problems.

Isolation Aid Fix

..

Check all grounds on the 5103 Printer Check the AC power source for

and on the 5100. proper grQUnEling.

Check that the forms tractor unit is

mounted securely on the printer.

Check the frame ground

to forms

guide.

Check the ground strap connections.

Check the

I/O interface cable

grounds.

Check

for noise being generated by

other equipment on the AC power

line.

r'

Wavy printing. occurs, or left margin

varies by one position.

None.

Place printer on a solid surface.

Reposition the paper deflector on the

left side.

Replace the print emitter pickup. (See

the

5103

MIM.1

Tighten the power supply mounting

screws.

Fails

to print in the first few positions None.

in each line.

All print wires fire at the left margin

or the motor hangs up at the left

margin.

End of forms and forms motion

problems.

Check the emitter pickup for

excessive solder that might be

shorting out the print emitter board.

Check the screws

inthe 5100 power

supply. Loose mounting screws can

cause noise

to be generated

throughout the system.

Forms feed fails

to index.

Check

for binds and other mechanical Repair binds in the platen gears, idler

problems. gears, forms

motor/emitter assembly,

or forms tractor unit.

See the

5103

MIM for adjustments

and replacement.

Replace the broken idler gear stud on

the forms

motor/emitter assembly.

Adjust

or replace the forms emitter

assembly.

Replace the forms feed emitter

amplifier.

I

Adjust or replace the end of forms

switch.

Replace the motor driver card (A

1

B

1

I

.

Forms run backward.

Fails

to print.

None.

Do a copy display.

Adjust the forms emitter. (See the

5103

MIM.1

Replace the printer adapter card.

:3-100 : .

Symptom Isolation Aid

None.

Fix

Adjust or replace the end of forms

switch. (See the 5103

MIM.)

Adjust or replace the print emitter

pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.)

Adjust the copy control dial.

(

(

Fails to print or head fails to move.

Adjust the print head

to platen

clearance.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

Check for shorts between the print

emitter and print emitter pickup.

Print plot fails to print.

Extra line spaces.

Printer diagnostics should run

OK.

Replace the G2 card in the 5100.

(

Check for excessive play in gear train.

Adjust or repair excessive gear play.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

This causes incorrect partial lines.

Adjust or replace the forms emitter.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

Variable line sl*lcing (forms creep).

Excessive play in the gears.

The forms emitter is not adjusted

properly.

Adjust the gear wink.

Adjust the forms emitter. (See 5103

MIM.)

The forms tractor unit is not mounted

securely.

((

Print line skewed or crooked.

The forms tractor unit must be

parallel

with the platen and seated at

all four mounted points.

Remove the right side cover and

loosen the

two shaft screws 1 / 8 to

1 /4 turn to allow the forms tractor to

seat properly.

Check

for cover interference.

Uneven left margin.

None.

Adjust the left margin. (See the 5103

MIM.)

Check the adjustments of the print

emitter and the print emitter pickup.

(See the 5103

MIM.)

1:(

Missing part of the character in print

position 1.

None.

Adjust the left margin.

(See the 5103

MIM.)

Check the adjustments of the print

emitter and the print emitter pickup.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

Overpri

nti ng.

Overprinting occurs

if a print emitter

error is detected while a line is being

printed.

If the data is correct. check

for a defective or misadjusted print

emitter

or print emitter pickup.

Adjust

or replace the print emitter or

the print emitter pickup. (See the

5103

MIM.)

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-101

Symptom

Backward printing

'(mir~or

image).

Isolation Aid

Check the parallelism between the

print emitter and the print emitter

pickup. Use the

two small land

patterns on the

top right side of the

printer

to aid you in making this

check. The distance between the land

patterns and the print emitter pickup

should

not vary more than 0.025

inches (0.64 mm).

Fix

Reform the right side frame near the

support shaft. Adjust the gap

between the print emitter and the

print emitter pickup. (See the 5103

MIM.) Also check that the print

emitter moves freely

as the horizontal

fine adjustment knob is turned

to

both extremes.

Check the ground locations.

/

I

I

Adjust

or replace the end of the

forms switch.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

I

Replace the print head cable. (See

the 5103 MIM.)

Adjust

or replace the print emitter or

the print emitter pickup. (See the

5103 MIM.)

Light printing.

Adjust the copy control dial.

Replace the ribbon. Adjust the

clearance between the print head and

the platen.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

One end

of a print line is darker.

Check the A-frame alignment. (See

the 5103 MIM.)

The ribbon is not advancing. Check

for broken ribbon drive lines,

defective drive clutches, and incorrect

alignment

of the ribbon drive gears.

Also check that the ribbon feed roll

release knob is in the proper position.

Not enough tension on the two print

Check

for 700 to 900 grams of

head springs.

tension at the tip of the print head

near the print wires. This

measurement should be taken while

the platen is removed and with the

print head located near the center

of

the machine.

Check for mechanical. binds, sticking,

or other interference that would

prevent the print head from making

complete contact

with the platen.

Especially check the print head cable.

Every other line has light printing.

None.

Check

for broken ribbon drive lines.

Check

for a defective ribbon drive

clutch.

3~102

I'

Symptom

Broken print wires.

Isolation Aid

To prevent breaking print wires:

Set the copy control dial

to the proper

forms thickness.

Instruct operators never

to print over

perforations, feed holes or the edge

of the forms.

Ensure that all fixes

for ribbon jams

are installed.

Fix

(

Printer blows fuses.

(

Disconnect

EC3 at the print head to Check for more than one active wire

drive signal from the system.

keep from blowing fuses; then

measure the wire driver inputs at

cable A1A3 with your meter. All

Check for a defective signal cable.

inputs should be at

an up level of

+4.5 to +5.5 Vdc or +1.4 to +20 Vdc.

A

down level indicates an active level.

None.

Replace A1A1 card and the

Q1

transistor.

+24 Vdc supply voltage is too high.

Printing stops.

Capacitor C4 is the filter capacitor for The problem can be caused by any of

the +5 Vdc to the printer. the following:

• Open capacitor

C4.

• Loose, broken, or poorly crimped

wire between C4 and point 1 A.

• Open circuit between point 1 A and

test point V4.

• Loose, broken,

or poorly crimped

wire between point 4F and

capacitor

C4.

• Open land pattern between point

4F and test point

GS.

(

Replace the A 1 A 1 card.

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-103

Symptom Isolation Aid Fix

/

Adjust, repair, or replace the end'

of

Printing stops intermittently or printer Disable the end of the forms switch

by jumpering

A1-A3D13 to

prints backward when running

forms switch, the wiring, or the

diagnostics or programs.

mechanism.

(See the 5103 MIM.) Al-A3C08. Ifthe symptom

disappears, the problem is in the end

of the forms switch, the mechanism,

or the wiring.

Printing stops.

Check the print emitter or print

emitter pickup boards

for warpage or

contaminants. Adjust, repair, or

replace as required. (See the 5103

MIM.)

Component failures are not always

Replace the forms feed photocell

detected by the static checks. They

assembly

or forms feed emitter

can, however, cause the printer

to fail

amplifier. (See the 5103 MIM.1

under dynamic (operating) conditions.

An oscilloscope normally is required

to detect these problems.

Print head carrier stops near right

side.

Check that the belt clamp does not

touch the print head stepper motor

when the print head carrier is moved

to the extreme right.

None.

Adjust the belt clamp

as required.

""

,

/

051 error. Replace print head cable.

Breaking print wires, jamming ribbon,

Check for the correct part number on If the H2 card is part 1607112 and

and jamming paper.

the printer adapter card and the H2 the printer adapter card is part

card. 1607124, the adapter card is

for a

120 characters per second printer.

Replace the printer adapter card

with

part 1607130, which is for a 60

characters per second printer.

Solid 050 error.

Probe the P13 pin on the printer

adapter card

to ensure 'EOF line is

up.

ON/OFF switch checks OK.

Repair defective A 1 power board.

'

"

..

,/

Intermittent 057 errors while printing.

051 errors.

Print emitter board course adjustment Tighten print emitter board course

screws are loose. adjustment screws.

Check

for +8.5 volts in the 5103. If the +8.5 volt power is missing,

repair the connection on the A 1

power connector

in the 5100.

Replace the missing pin that holds the

print head pulley

to the stepper

motor.

When error codes are checked and

052 errors occur, replace defective

forms emitter stepper motor.

057 and 059 errors.

None.

Forms movement problem

with no

error codes.

Customer uses APL, and program is

not checking

for error codes.

3·104

(

(

Symptom Isolation Aid

Fix

Not printing some dots (on print plot All diagnostics run OK.

Replace print head.

only).

Forms feeding fails

to stop on 050 None.

Repair bouncing

EOF switch or adjust

error.

EOF switch.

Missing dots, or extra dots printed. The 5103 may add or drop a

Replace F2 card in the 5100.

complete vertical line

for a character

and have no error halts.

Solid 052 errors. Copy display fails. Replace F2 card in the Sioo.

Print misalignment vertically. When running MOl 800, the second

Check

for binds or replace the ribbon

or third line

of Hs are misaligned

drive roll assembly.

vertically.

051 errors. Check for voltages dropping when the Replace C2, C3, or C4 capacitors.

error occurs.

Intermittent or solid 052 errors. Probe the signal on the printer

Replace the A2 card or cable in the

adapter card pin C5J 13.

It should be

5100.

pulsing.

Failure to print or 057 errors occur Check for +5 volts at TP-V5. Replace shorted emitter board.

when trying

to power up a 5100 APL

machine with the 5103 printer turned

on.

Left margin varies.

Printer recently changed from

an 80 Ensure that the H2 card is part

characters per second to a 120

1607126.

characters per second machine.

Intermittent 056 errors.

Fails when printing right

to left past

Repair print head cable.

position 100.

057 errors or wavy print.

Print head does

not move smoothly.

Replace print emitter board.

052 errors.

Check 'forms emitter A' line at pin

Replace forms emitter stepper

motor

V07 and

'forms emitter B' line at pin assembly.

S12. Both lines should be pulsing

when the printer is spacing paper.

Carrier belt

not tracking correctly.

Belt is improperly adjusted.

Move print head

to the right margin

and adjust the carrier belt.

Paper jams.

Not a new style printer with the

Check

for bent pins on the tractor

ON/OFF switch on the front. assembly. Check to see the ECA 11

(EC 812672) is installed.

Print plot has misaligned dots.

None.

Use paper with a thickness of 0.0030

to 0.0075 inches (0.075 to 0.188

mm).

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-105

PRINTEft SERVICE TIPS

Reset Signal Line Checkout

A 'reset' signal line that is not functioning pl'OJ)erly

will

not always cause printer failures. Consequently, there is

no particular symptom associated with this problem. If

you suspect that the 'rl!!sef signal line is not functioning

properly.

use the fbllowing J)rocedure to check out the

'reset' signal

in the printer:

1.

Power down the

5100.

2.

Do not power down the printer.

3.

Probe B1-84, 812 (-Reset).

4. Power up the

5100.

5.

Check that the probe DOWN light is ori.

6.

Press the HOLD key. Press the CMD key and the

+

key to copy the display.

7. Check that the probe UP light is on.

B. Power down the printer.

9.

Check that the probe DOWN light is on.

~rint

Emitter

Timing Using

MOl

805

If you are doing left margin adjustments, run MOl 805.

This MOl checks the timing

of the left margin. You can

also loop on step to theck for intermittent errors. If you

do the print emitter pickup adjustment 340, do the left

margin adjustment 343 and run MOl 800

to verify the

adjustments.

3-106

Forms Emitter Timing Scope Procedure

1. Remove the forms tractor unit and the paper.

2.

Move the copy control dial to eliminate printing on

the . platen.

3.

Load printer diagnostic MOl

BOO.

Loop on the

step number that indicates quick forms movement

test

(PT01V5).

/

4.

Place the scope lead On U07 on the printer

adapter card (forms emitter A). Display one pulse

on the screen.

Good: Adjust until display looks like this:

Bad:

__ -..o!J

Bad:

u

n

1

1..

--~"----

Forms Jams

The following items can cause forms jams and incorrect

forms movement:

There

is incorrect pressure plate clearance on the

forms tractor.

The paper deflector

is too close to the platen.

The cut form guide

on the left rear top cover is

not flipped back

or it is used with continuous

forms.

The paper path is incorrect.

See the BASIC or

APL reference manuals for correct forms feed

paths.

.

... ./

Forms

are being used that are thicker than

specified. The maximum forms thickness allowed

is 0.018 inch (4.572 mm). See the

Form Design

Reference

Guide,

GA24-348B.

The ribbon shield might be too close to the platen.

The forms tractor unit

is not parallel with the

platen and is not fully seated at

all four mounting

points.

All the pressure rolls do not contact the platen

evenly.

Ribbon Jams

Check the following items if you are experiencing

frequent ribbon jams:

The ribbon shield is not adjusted properly.

There is improper tracking

of the ribbon through

the ribbon feed rolls. The ribbon should

not be

above the rollers more than 0.010

to 0.015 inch

(0.254

to 0.381 mm). If the ribbon is above the

rollers, one of the following could be the cause:

• The rollers are

not adjusted properly. Check

that the rollers are the same height and are not

cocked.

f

• The print head cover is hitting the print cable

near the oil reservoir. This can cause the left

side

of the head cover to rise and lift the ribbon

off the print head. If this condition is present,

cut a small portion from the head cover where

it hits the head cable.

• The ribbon box may

be positioned too low.

Loosen the

two screws holding the ribbon box

to the carrier (one on the left side and one in

the bottom of the box), and raise or lower the

box

for proper ribbon tracking through the

ribbon rollers. Retighten the screws.

(

-The ribbon drive rolls are sticking. Remove and

clean the rollers.

There are metal spacers

in the ribbon roller

assembly between the rubber rolls and the plastic

housing. Replace the rollers

if either spacer is

missing (one at the top of the rollers and one at

the bottom).

-The print wires are protruding beyond the face

of

the print head by more than 0.002 inch (0.0508

mm).

The copy control dial

is improperly set. The dial

should be set for good print quality on the last

(/

copy and no smudging on the first copy. The

numbers on the copy control dial do not

correspond

to the number of parts in the form.

(~:

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-107

5103 FORMS FEED STEPPER MOTOR/EMITTER

5. Connect the probe power lead (red) to test point

TIMING

V5 and the black lead

to G6.

6. Place the Printer Adapter card in the service

Adjustment

position on machines with

EC 579623 or EC

579920. Refer to the 5103 MIM (312).

Two techniques are available for the adjustment of the

emitter timing: the general logic probe method and a

7. Probe A2-U07 on the B1 board with the probe

program that must be entered manually. The logic probe

ground lead on

P08. On

machine~

without EC

method provides sufficient accuracy

for normal printer

579623 or EC 579920, probe TPA on the forms

applications, but,

print/ plot applications that require

feed emitter amplifier

card. with the probe

reverse forms motion may need

to use the programming

ground lead on test point G8.

technique.

8. Power up.

General Logic Probe (GLP) Adjustment Method

9.

Slide the photocell down as far as possible.

1.

Power down.

10. Slowly slide the assembly up until the probe UP

light comes on.

2.

Remove the printer cover. Refer to the 5103

MIM

(310).

Note:

If the UP light is on with the photocell down

as far as possible, slide the assembly up until the

3.

Connect a jumper wire between test points FMA

UP light goes out and then comes back on.

and

G7 • (forms motor driver A to ground).

a. Hold the photocell assembly firmly in place and

a. Move the black wire from TPB2-6C to

tighten the

two screws.

TPB2-3C. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300).

b. Verify the adjustment as follows:

b. Move the red wire from TPB2-5B to TPB2-6C.

-Apply a small amount

of forward force on

the platen knob. The probe should stay at

4.

Loosen the photocell assembly (two screws

II

the up level when you remove your hand

behind the motor) so that the assembly will slide

from the knob.

but not move by itself.

-Apply a small amount

of backward force on

the platen knob. The probe should stay at a

down level when you remove your hand from

the knob.

c. Readjust if necessary.

d. Power down.

e. Move the red wire from TPB2-6C back to

TPB2-5B. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300).

f. Move the black wire from TPB2-3C back

to

TPB2-6C.

,/

TPB

0

/

TPAO

Right End

VieVli

3-108

11.

Remove the probe and jumper wire. Reinstall the

(

printer adapter card on machines that required

removal.

12.

Reinstall the printer cover and forms tractor unit.

13. Check the adjustment by running MOl 800;

readjust

if necessary.

(

Note:

If adjusted incorrectly, the forms motor might run

backwards.

(

Manual

Entry Programming

Method

This technique is similar to the 5110 MOl 0800 emitter

adjustment routine and may

be used on both the 5100

and the 5110 computer systems. Initial

set-up for the

adjustment should include the installation

of the tractor

assembly and the insertion and engagement

of paper

under the platen

with platen rolls engaged.

Initial entries on the 5100 computer system are:

1. Load OCP1 normal mode (See DCP 1

Normal Mode

in this section.)

2.

Alter read/write storage locations 3F70 through

3FFF by entering the data given in the data table

that follows.

3. Press the spacebar after all characters have been

entered.

4. Enter:

BR 3F70.

5. Press the EXECUTE key.

Refer to the following material on Test Description in

this section.

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-109

DATA TABLE

Read/Write Storage

Location

Data

,

3F70 8541 8645 8700 A005 858B 868A 8740 840C

3F80 8000 0204 15EO OF54 OB01 0500 C003 AOO5

3F90 1560 OF64 FBFF

05AE

OC01 1500 1590

0904

3FAO 05EE COOB OE47 OE45 D101 1593 01E6 5108

3FBO 159F

8804

CE45 CE4E 0847 0807 01A4 01E7

3FCO C185 AOO7 7FBO OAE4 CMOC A011 FCOO 01CC

3FOO

01C6

C103 0094

OF74 7FBO CB04 F005 1510

3FEO DC01

8000

FCOO 01CC 01C6

C103

F009 OD47

3FFO 0024

0000 0000 0000

0000

0000 0000

0000

Test

Description:

When the program has begun to

execute, the 5103 platen should be rotating back and

forth. The accuracy

of the emitter adjustment is

displayed with a series

of arrows. If there are no binds

in the carriage and the emitter is

in adjustment,

approximately 1 and

1/3 lines of arrows should be

pointing up, and 1 and 1/3 lines of arrows should be

point down.

If the lines of arrows are not with

±

three arrows of

being the same length, the forms emitter needs to be

adjusted. If the print/ plot feature is on the system using

the printer, the emitter should be adjusted

to give within

±

one arrow of the same length lines.

Loosen the forms emitter and move

it slightly in the

direction

of the greater number of arrows. The length of

the lines of arrows is an indication of the relative

freedom from binds in the platen.

The pattern of arrows shown below would require a

slight downward adjustment

of the emitter to obtain a

±

one arrow adjustment accuracy.

tttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttftttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt

ttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~+++~+++++~~+~~~+~~++++++~+~+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++~++

~~~~+~~~+~~~~~~~+~+++++~~+++~+~

3-110

(

(

Saving the Manually Entered Diagnostic Program:

The

diagnostic program may

be saved on a tape cartridge

that can be reserved

for this purpose. Do not store the

program on the diagnostic tape

or in a used file. Insert

a

scratch

tape cartridge with a file marked for at least 1 K

bytes.

, GENERAL PROBLEM SOLVING

General Procedures

General procedures to resolve intermittent and

miscellaneous problems follow:

• Whenever possible, identify the problem area (such

as forms feed, print head, ribbon feed). The

customer-reported symptom may be used

to do this,

especially

if the diagnostics run without error. If a

problem area can be identified, refer

to the

Diagnostic

Aids

section of this manual and select an MDI

pertaining to the area or problem.

• Check the mechanical parts

for loose screws, broken

springs, loose parts, binds, interference, or other

visual problems. When possible, operate the

mechanical parts manually

to find clues to the

problem.

• Ensure that all connectors, cards, wires, and jumpers

are securely plugged.

• Check all connectors, taper pins, and other terminals

for poor crimps, defective parts, excessively loose

contacts, or other noticeable problems.

• Check

for wires or cables that might be pinched or

are intermittently shorting.

• Check for broken wires that might break contact

intermittently.

• Check

for discoloring of the circuit cards that might

indicate overheating

of a component.

After any repairs or corrections, run the diagnostics to

verify proper operation.

To store locations 3F70 through 3FFF, perform the

following steps:

1. Load DCP1 diagnostic mode.

Enter: C

Hold down the CMD key and press

9.

Enter: 3F70 3FFF 0001

OO4B

0000

Press the EXECUTE key.

2.

(

3.

4.

5.

This program will write the data stored from 3F70

through

3FFF into file 0001 of the tape cartridge. A

different file may

be used but the 0001 must be

changed

to a different file number and entered in

hexadecimal

to identify the different file.

(

Loading the

Forms

Emitter

Test

Program from Tape:

Perform the following steps to load the test program

from the tape cartridge:

1. Load DCP1 diagnostic mode.

Enter: C

Hold down the CMD key and press 8 on the

numeric key pad.

Enter: 3F70 0001 0000

Press the

EXECUTE key. (The program will be

loaded form file 0001 [hex] of the tape cartridge.)

Enter:

BR 3F70

Press the EXECUTE key. (The program will begin

to execute.)

Note: The file number must be in hex.

2.

3.

4.

5.

(

-.

6.

7.

(

If a file other than file 1 was specified when the

program was stored on the tape cartridge, then you

must specify that file by using a hex number during the

~"

.. entry of the commands given above. Step 4 specifies

file 1

with the hex byte 0001. This should be changed

--/

to properly identify the file used on the tape cartridge.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-111

General Problems and Service Hints

• If the forms are jamming, tearing, or feeding

incorrectly:

There might be incorrect clearance between the

chain guide and the cover on the forms tractor

unit. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (325).

The paper deflector might

be too close to the

platen. The deflector is held up by four prongs

(two prongs on each side); these prongs should be

formed down so the deflector rests

On the flat

springs between the pressure rolls. Refer

to the

5103

MIM (320).

The cut forms guide might not be flipped back

as

it should be (on old style machines) when yOu use

continuous forms.

The cover might not be aligned properly. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (310).

The ribbon shield might be

too close to the platen.

There should

be a minimum of 0.008 inches (0.20

mm) clearance between the ribbon shield and the

platen when the copy control dial is set at

O.

Refer to the 5103 MIM (366).

Forms might be thicker than' the allowed maximum

of 0.018 inches (0.46 mm). Refer to the

Forms

Design Reference Guide,

GA24-3488.

The forms tractor unit might not be parallel with

the platen and might

not be fully seated at all four

mounting points. Improper se8tingis usually

caused by a twisted forms tractor unit.

If the

forms tractor unit is

stiff when twisted, remove the

right side cover and loosen the

two shaft screws

1/8 to 1/4 of

a

turn.

Ensure that the forms are inserted correctly. Refer

to

BASIC Reference Guide,

SA21-9217 orAPL

Reference Guide,

SA21-9213 for the method of

inserting forms. The forms feeding might be

improved if you remove the cut forms guide and

route the forms over the printer cover rather than

over the plastic rollers.

If the forms feed fails to index correctly:

There might

be mechanical binds in the platen

gears, the idler gear, the forms motor/emitter

assembly, or the forms tractor unit. Refer to the

5103

MIM (324, 326, 327, 328, 329, or 330).

-The idler gear stud on the forms motor/emitter

assembly might be broken.

-The forms emitter assembly might be defective or

out

of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332).

The forms feed amplifier

might be defective. The

forms feed amplifier might

be located on a small

card either mounted on the fOrms

motor/emitter

assembly or mounted on the printer adapter card.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (332).

The end

of forms switch might be defective or out

of adjustment, or it might have loose wires on the

terminals. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (334).

Card A1B1 might be defective. Refer to the 5103

MIM (304).

If the form feeds continuously:

This problem usually pertains

to the 5100. The

forms feed motor in the printer will

not advance

unless

it receives drive pulses from the 5100.

Shorted or open signal lines

in the 5103 will not

cause continuous indexing.

If there are extra line spaces or the forms space or

skip

too far:

The 5103 requires 16 stepper motor pulses

to

advance one line space. If the form advances

more than one complete line space, the problem is

in the 5100.

If the form advances part of a line space, the

forms emitter might be defective or out

of

adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). There

might

be too much play in the gear train. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (327).

If the form creeps and causes variable line spacing:

There might be

too much play in the gear train.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (327).

The forms emitter might be out

of adjustment.

Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). Be sure to use the

5103 M I M at level 2 or later for the correct

adjustment.

The forms tractor unit might not be mounted

securely.

If the form runs backwards:

The forms emitter might be

out of adjustment.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (332).

I

,..-,

"'

.

./

",-j

3-112

• If the printed line is skewed or crooked:

The forms tractor unit might not

be parallel with

the platen and might not be fully seated at all four

mounting points.

a. Improper seating is usually caused by a twisted

forms tractor unit.

If the forms tractor unit is

stiff when twisted, remove the right side cover

(-

and loosen the two shaft screws 1/8 to 1/4 of

a turn.

b. There might

be interference between the

printer cover and the forms tractor unit which

does not allow the forms tractor unit

to seat

completely. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (310).

(

If the ribbon jams:

The ribbon shield might not

be installed correctly

and the ribbon might not be tracking below the

opening in the shield. Readjust the shield

to

obtain a minimum clearance of 0.007 inches (0.18

mm) between the print head and the shield at the

bottom. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (366).

Check

for proper tracking of the ribbon through

the ribbon feed rolls. Refer

to the 5103 MIM

(376). The ribbon should not be more than 0.015

inches (0.39 mm) above the feed rolls.

If the

ribbon is too far above the feed rolls, one

of the

following might be the cause:

a. The feed rolls might not be adjusted properly.

(

They should be the same height and not

cocked.

b. The print head cover might be hitting the cable

near the oil reservoir. This can cause the left

side

of the cover to rise and lift the ribbon off

the print head. If this condition exists, cut a

small piece from the cover where

it hits the

cable. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (301).

c. The ribbon box might be positioned too low.

To raise the ribbon box, loosen the

two screws

that hold the ribbon box

to the carrier (one

screw on the left side and one screw

in the

bottom

of the box). Then raise the box for

proper tracking and tighten the screws. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (301).

The ribbon might be sticking

to the feed rolls.

Remove and clean the feed rolls. Refer

to the

5103

MIM (374).

(--

Check

for metal spacers between the feed rolls

and the feed roll carrier. There should be a spacer

at both the top and the bottom of the feed roll.

Replace the feed rolls

if both spacers are not

installed. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (376).

Ensure that the print wires do

not protrude more

than 0.002 inches (0.051 mm) beyond the face

of

the print head.

Improper setting

of the copy control dial can lead

to ribbon jams. The dial should be set for a good

print quality on the last copy and no smudging on

the first copy. The numbers on the dial do not

correspond

to the number of parts in the form.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (301).

• If the printer fails to print or the print head fails to

move:

The end

of forms switch might be defective or out

of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (334).

The print emitter

or print emitter pickup might be

defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103

MIM (340 and 341).

The forms feed might not have indexed after the

last print line. Refer

to the service hints above

labeled

If

the

Forms Feed

Fails

to

Index Correctly.

The copy control dial might not be correctly set for

the thickness of the copy.

The print head

to platen clearance might be too

large. Refer to the 5103 MIM (360).

There might be a short circuit between the print

emitter and the print emitter pickup. Refer

to the

5103

MIM (302). The only place the two should

join is at the plastic pads.

• Overprinting:

Overprinting occurs

if a print emitter error is

detected while a line is being printed.

If no error

occurs and the printed data is correct and in the

proper format, check

for a print emitter or a print

emitter pickup that is defective

or out of

adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (340 and

341).

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-113

• Light printing:

The copy control dial

might not be set correctly.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (301).

The ribbon might need

to be replaced.

-The clearance between the platen and the print

head might be too large. Refer to the 5103 MIM

(360).

There

might not be enough tension on the two

print head springs. There should be 700 to 900

grams of tension at the tip of the print head near

the print wires. This measurement should be taken

with the platen removed and the print head near

the center

of the machine.

Check for mechanical binding, sticking, or

interference that would keep the print head from

moving all the

way forward toward the platen.

Especially check

to ensure that the print head

cable does not interfere.

The ribbon

might not be advancing. Check for

broken ribbon drive lines, defective drive clutches,

and misalignment

of the ribbon drive gears.

Check

to ensure that the ribbon feed roll release

knob is in the proper position. Refer

to the 5103

MIM (301).

If one end of the printed line is darker than the

other, check the

A-frame alignment. Also check

for a bent platen shaft. Refer to the 5103 MIM

(333).

3-114

If every other line prints light:

-One

of the ribbon drive lines might be broken.

Refer

to 5103 MIM (301).

-One

of the ribbon drive clutches might be

defective. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (302).

If the left margin is uneven:

-The

left margin might be set incorrectly. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (343).

Check the adjustments

of the print emitter and the

print emitter pickup. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (302,

340, and 341).

If all the print wires fire in the left margin area:

Replace the print emitter pickup. Refer

to 5103

MIM (302 and 341).

If part of the character in print position 1 is missing:

The

left margin might be set incorrectly. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (343).

-Check the adjustments

of the print emitter and

print emitter pickup. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (302,

340, and 341).

• Broken print wires:

-The following might cause breakage

of the print

wires:

a. Improper setting of the copy control dial for the

thickness

of the forms used.

b. Printing over the perforations, the feed holes, or

the edge of the forms.

c. Ribbon jams, which can cause the print wires to

catch on the ribbon and break the wires.

Ensure

that fixes or engineering changes for

ribbon jams are installed.

If the print head carrier stops when it approaches the

right side:

Ensure

that the belt clamp does not contact the

print head stepper

motor when the print head

carrier is moved

to the extreme right. Refer to the

5103

MIM (302).

If the 24 Vdc supply voltage is too high:

Replace card

AlA 1 and the transistor

Q

1.

Refer to

the 5103 MIM (303).

• If intermittent problems exist which are caused by

poor grounding:

Proper grounding is necessary

for proper operation

of the printer. Check the following list to help find

intermittent problems:

a. Ensure that the customer has provided the

proper grounding

for the 5100 (the green wire

goes

to ground).

b. Ensure that the I/O signal cables have a good

ground at the 5100.

c. Ensure that the forms tractor unit is set securely

on the printer.

d. Ensure that the wire forms rack is electrically

connected

to the printer frame. A resistance of

(

100K ohms or less between the forms rack and

the printer frame is acceptable. Refer

to the

5103

MIM (300).

e. It may be necessary to ground the forms rack

to the printer with a ground wire.

f. Check

for electrical noise generated from other

machines

in the area, or for electrically noisy

machines connected

to the same AC line as the

5100 computer.

If printing intermittently stops:

Capacitor C4 is the filter capacitor

for the +5Vdc

supply

to the printer. The printer might not

operate if this capacitor is

not in the circuit. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (303). Check for the following:

a. Capacitor C4 might be open.

b. The wire betweeen C4 and test point A 1 might

be loose or broken or might have a bad crimp.

c. The land pattern between test point A 1 and test

point V4 might be open.

d. The wire between capacitor C4 and test point

4F might be loose or broken or might have a

bad crimp.

e. The land pattern between test point 4F and test

point

G6 might be open. Refer to the 5103

MIM (386).

The circuit card A 1 A 1 contains most

of the control

circuits

forthe printer. This card may be replaced

in

an attempt to fix intermittent problems. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (303).

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-11&

3-116

This page intentionally left blank.

INTRODUCTION 4-3

I/O Devices

4-3

The 5103 Printer

4-3

f~

The 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit

4-3

Features

4-3

Serial

I/O Adapter Feature

4-3

Asynchronous Communications Feature 4-3

Katakana Feature .

4-4

Models

4-4

(

Functional Units

4-4

Keyboard

4-4

Display Adapter Card

4-4

Controller

4-4

Storage. 4-4

Base

I/O Card .

4-4

I/O Cable Driver

4-4

Microprogramming

4-4

INTERNAL OPERATION OF THE 5100 . 4-5

5100 Internal Operation Diagram 4-6

5100 Data Flow and Parity Checking 4-7

Keyboard and Control Panel

4-9

Switches and Controls

4-9

Lights. 4-10

Keyboard Data Flow .

4-10

Keyboard Operation

4-10

Keyboard Code Translation 4-10

(

Key Functions 4-11

Keyboard Error Checking

4-12

Microprogramming 4-12

CONTROLLER 4-15

5100 Controller Data Flow 4-15

5100 Controller Description

4-16

Storage Read Bus and Storage

Write Bus

4-16

Data Bus In 4-16

Data Bus

Out 4-16

Storage Address Bus 4-16

Internal Controller Organization

4-16

Machine Cycles 4-17

Interrupts 4-17

Error Checking .

4-18

I/O Data Flow Control 4-19

(

Read Only Storage 4-19

Read/Write Storage 4-23

Storage Data Flow 4-25

Storage Address Register 4-26

Storage

Read Bus

4-26

Storage

Write Bus

4-26

Storage Error Checking

4-26

Base

I/O Card .

4-26

(~

I/O Cable Driver Card

4-27

TAPE

4-28

Tape

Unit Overview

4-28

Tape Data Flow

4-29

Tape Operations

4-29

Tape Drive Components . 4-29

(

Tape Cartridge .

4-31

Tape

Writing and Formatting 4-32

Contents

Tracks

4-33

Files

4-33

Records.

4-34

Tape Position Markers

4-37

Tape

Motion

4-38

Forward Tape Motion 4-38

Reverse Tape

Motion

4-38

Operations

4-38

Mark

4-38

Find

4-39

Read

4-39

Write

4-39

Rewind

4-39

Backspace.

4-39

Tape Adapter .

4-40

Tape Adapter I/O Lines 4-41

Error Checking

4-44

DISPLAY.

4-45

Display Adapter .

4-45

Display Adapter Controls 4-46

TV Monitor. 4-49

POWER

4-50

AC Power Box

4-50

Power Supply

PC Board

4-51

DC Power Distribution .

4-51

Power Supply Protection

4-51

Referenced Voltage

4-51

5100 OPERATIONS 4-52

Power On Procedure, Initialization, and

Bring-up Diagnostic

4-52

I/O Operation and Data Transfer from Keyboard

to Display and Printer

4-52

Contents

4-1

2024年11月6日发(作者:欧阳高)

DCP1 NORMAL MODE

DCP1 normal mode can be entered during a customer

job

in order to display and alter data. Control of the

5100 can then be returned

to the customer program and

execution

of the job can continue.

You can return

to the customer job after displaying or

altering data, or you can continue from normal mode

to

diagnostic mode. Once the DCP1 diagnostic mode is

initiated on the keyboard, you cannot return

to the

customer job. You can, however, choose

to go from the

DCP1 diagnostic mode to DCP2 or do a RESTART.

To load the

DCP1 normal mode:

1. Press the HOLD key.

2. Press and hold the CMD key and press the -

(minus) key on the numeric keyboard.

To exit' from the DCP1 normal mode:

1. Press and hold the CMD key; then press the

+

(plus) key on the numeric keyboard.

When

DCP1 is loaded, the top eight lines on the display

are cleared, and the header

DCP1 is placed in the

middle

of both halves of the top line. The header is

repeated

in both halves of the display; it will appear

even

if the L32-64-R32 switch is set to display a

32.,.character line. The cursor flashes (or blinks)

whenever the keyboard is operational.

[

Depl

DCPl

)

'When the DCP1 normal mode is exited, the only change in

the display is the repositioning

of the cursor to the bottom of

the display screen.

3-18

/

Display

(

Display is a DCP1 normal mode function. To use this

function, you must load

DCP and then press the D key

and enter the starting address

of the location of the

read/write storage that you want to display.

The display

now shows 32 sequential locations of

read/write storage starting with the input address.

Scroll up

(t)

displays the next 16 bytes, and scroll down

(+)

displays the previous 16 bytes. The SPACE bar

returns control

to DCP1. To exit from DCP1 press and

hold the CMD key; then press the

+

(plus) key on the

numeric keyboard.

To display storage locations using a different starting

address, enter D and the new starting address.

Entry Format

(

Example:

nCPl

D 0120

ADDR

DCPl.

0120

0130

0000

OB56

0l.B2

OOl8

019C

OOIA

OOlD

0272

OlAO

0276

OIAl.

027A

0000

027E

0000

0282

Valid Input Keys

Valid

Input Keys

Calls the display function to

display read/write storage.

Scrolls forward; displays the

next 32 bytes.

Scrolls backward; displays the

previous 32 bytes.

SPACE bar

Cancels the requested fUnctidn.

To turn

off the PROCESS CHECK

light,

press the RESTART key.

Calls the DCP1 diagnostic mode.

D

t

CMD and

*

or

x (multiply on

the numeric

keyboard)

CMD and

+

(plus on the

numeric

keyboard)

0-9, A-F

Enters hex characters.

Returns to the customer program

if the DCP1 diagnostic mode has

not been called.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-19

Alter

Alter is a

DCP1 normal mode function. In order to use

this function, you

must first load DCP1 by holding the

CMD key and pressing the HOLD key; then hold the

CMD key and press the -(minus) key. To select the

alter function, press

A; then enter the starting address

of the location of the read/write storage you want to

alter.

After you enter a starting address, the existing contents

of 32 bytes of read/write storage are displayed on two

lines of 16 bytes each. New data can be entered on the

top line only. The display is altered with each keystroke.

Entry Format

New data is entered into read/write storage in two

ways:

• Press the EXECUTE key.

• Enter the 16th byte.

In both cases, the

top line is read/write

storage and the display is advanced one line to atlow

additional entries. This option allows you

to enter a

program that ed immediately. Pressing the

SPACE bar terminates the alter function and returns

control

to DCP1. To exit from DCP1, hold the CMD key

and press the

+

(plus) key on the numeric keyboard.

A

xxxx

Example:

DCP1

A '+000

'+000

'+010

DCP1

/

ADDR

".

j

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

Valid Input Keys

Valid

Input Keys

A Calls the alter function to alter read/

write storage.

Scrolls forward and displays the next

16 bytes.

Scrolls backward

and displays the

previous 16 bytes.

EXECUTE

Enters the altered hex data into

read/write storage.

Cancels the requested function.

./

t

SPACE bar

CMD

and

*

or

x (multiply on

the numeric

keyboard)

CMD

and

+

(plus on the

numeric

keyboard)

Calls the DCP1 diagnostic mode.

0-9, A-F

-+

Enters hex characters.

Spaces forward.

Backspaces.

Returns to the customer program if

the

DCP1 diagnostic mode has not

been called.

+-

3-20.

(

(-

.

(/

DCP1 DIAGNOSTIC MODE

To enter DCP1 diagnostic mode, first call in the DCP1

program. Entry into diagnostic mode is made through

the keyboard by

pressing and holding the CMD key and

pressing the

*

(asterisk) or x (multiply) key on the numeric

keyboard. Entering

these keys out of sequence cancels the

requested function.

All address specifications for the various diagnostic

functions are forced

to an even halfword boundary.

Recovery from

an error is accomplished by starting the

routine over again. Recovery from a process check is

accomplished by pressing RESTART. Exit from

DCP1

diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART.

DCP1 Diagnostic Mode Functions

Branch:

This function is used in the tape read tests

and, at times, when receiving plant assistance. Branch

exits

DCP1 diagnostic mode to execute code located in

executable ROS or in read/write storage.

When exiting from the diagnostic mode, the keyboard is

activated

to accept the CMD and ATTN combination.

This key combination cancels any operation and returns

control

to DCP1 diagnostic mode (unless the branch

was

to another keyboard control routine). Therefore,

when branching

to tape read or DCP2, any of the

branch operations can be cancelled.

The

BH (branch and halt) halts processing when the halt

address is reached in the instruction address register of

level 0; a shift and ATTN key combination restores the

microinstruction at the halted address and forces level 0

to a halt.

At this time, the 5100 Portable Computer should be

placed in step mode. Pressing ATTN again resumes

processing

in level 0 following completion of the step

mode in level 3. The space bar returns control

to DCP1

diagnostic mode.

Valid Branch Input Keys

BE Branch to executable ROS address.

BH Branch to read/write storage address and

halt at the specified address.

BR

Branch to read/write storage address with

no halt.

EXECUTE Execute the preceding branch instruction

and exit from the branch routine but re-

main in DCP1 diagnostic mode.

DCP1 normal mode keys are also valid in DCP1 diagnostic

mode.

Branch Display Formats

Branch in executable

ROS with no halt:

BE ROS@

xxxx

EXEC -

Branch in read/write storage with no halt:

BR MEM@

xxxx

EXEC -

Branch in read/write storage with halt:

BH MEM@

xxxx

HALT@

yyyy

EXEC -

xxxx

=

Branch address in hex.

yyyy

=

Halt address in hex.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-21

Call:

This function allows you to load the tape read test

into read/write storage for execution, and allows you to

execute the op code, read/write storage, and ROS test

routines from executable

ROS. Call also provides tape

copy

and storage dump functions.

Once DCP1 diagnostic mode is entered, use the following

keying

sequence to use the call function:

1.

Press C.

2. Hold the CMD key and press a numeric key to load

the call routines.

Use the numeric keyboard for

entering digits 0-9.

3. Press EXECUTE.

Each call routine is identified by a digit (0·9) preceded by

CMD.

The following list

shows the format for all routines and

their names:

Routine Name

CMDO Tape Read Test

CMD 1

Tape Read Test

CMD2

OP Code Loop Test

CMD3

ROS Read CRC Loop Test

CMD4 ROS Address Loop Test

CMD5

Read/Write Storage Test

CMD6

Not Assigned

CMD 7

Not Assigned

CMD8

Tape to Storage Dump

CMD 9

Storage Dump

to Tape

3·22

Tape Read Tests -CMD 0 and CMD 1

CMDO

C TAPE TEST

EXEC -

This routine tests the read function on the tape unit. It

performs the same tests as the CMD 1 routine except

the forward motion and reverse motion test. Therefore,

this test provides a faster access

to the DCP2 program.

Return

to DCP1 diagnostic mode by holding CMD and

pressing ATTN. Exit DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing

RESTART.

CMD 1

C TAPE DrAG

EXEC -

This routine tests the read function on the tape unit. It

also tests the forward and reverse motion. This test

provides access

to the DCP2 program. Return to DCP1

diagnostic mode by holding CMD and pressing ATTN.

Exit from

DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART.

/

Loading

(

CAUTION

Do not insert the CE diagnostic cartridge until instructed

to do so on the display. The tape might be erased if

inserted too soon.

Refer

to

DCP

1 Diagnostic Mode in this section.

Hold CMD and press HOLD

(

Hold CMD and press -(minus) on the numeric

keyboard

Hold CMD and press • or x (multiply) on the numeric

keyboard

Press C

Hold CMD and press 1 on the numeric keyboard

Press

EXECUTE

You can return to DCP1 diagnostic mode from the tape

read test by holding CMD and pressing ATTN.

The tape read test is called into

read/write storage

when CMD 1 is entered. Pressing

EXECUTE starts the

test.

Some of the tests in the tape read test require answers

to questions put on the display. Follow the instructions

given and answer the questions carefully. The following

message is also displayed during some

of the tests:

PRESS EXECUTE, R, OR L

EXECUTE

=

go to next test

R

=

retry this test

L

=

loop on this test

Do NOT press EXECUTE,

R, or L until directed to do so

by the instructions.

The characters DCP2 MENU appear on the display when

the tape read test is finished.

The program can be rerun by

preSSing ATTN, entering

BR 2Boo, and pressing EXECUTE. However, once

another program is selected from the DCP2 menu, the

tape read test cannot be run unless

it is recalled from

nonexecutable ROS via DCP1.

Retry

Test

Pressing R retries the present test once.

If an error

exists after pressing

R, the following error message

appears on the display screen:

ERROR

XXX E 80 GOTO MAP 0300

Loop

On Test

If an error occurs, pressing L causes the program to

loop on the present test. After pressing L, a F (fail) or a

P (pass)

is displayed on the bottom right side of the

display screen. The F indicates that

an error exists and

. the P indicates that

an error does not exist.

To stop looping, hold CMD and press ATTN. This stops

the tape read test.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-23

Rerun Test

To run the tape read test again (since it is still in

read/write storage), do the following:

Remove the CE diagnostic cartridge

Enter

BR (branch to read/write storage)

Enter

2BOO (starting address of the tape read test)

Press

EXECUTE

Follow the instructions on the display (some loops

will not have instructions)

The

CE diagnostic cartridge must be removed before

retrying the tape read· test.

Loop

On

Error Code

A specific test within the tape read tests can be looped

I

by holding CMD, pressing ATTN, and altering location

280C

to the error number of the test (allows you to loop

on a specific test any time). Looping in this manner is

the same

as pressing L when the instruction press

EXECUT1:, R, or L is displayed.

Refer

to the tape read test and auxiliary tape MDI

routines in this section

for error numbers.

3-24

For example, to loop on error 0912:

Hold CMD and press ATTN

Remove the

CE diagnostic cartridge

Alter location

2BOC to the error number as. follows:

Press A

Enter

2BOC

Enter 0912

Press the space bar

Enter

BR 2800 (starting address of tape read

tests)

Press

EXECUTE

The tape read test will execute normally until the

test you selected is reached.

Follow the instructions on the display. Tests run prior

to

the first display will loop without displaying instructions.

Display messages:

F (fail) -error

,/

P (pass) -no error

Looping stops when you hold CMD and press ATTN.

Op Code Loop Test -CMD 2 ROS Address Loop Test -CMD 4

(

(

C OP CODE

EXEC -

This routine tests all controller microinstructions.

Numerous IAR (instruction address register) hang points

localize specific failing processor operations and monitor

C ROS ADR

EXEC -

This test sends nonexecutable ROS addresses to the

ROS adapter, reads back several halfwords of data, and

then reads back the address to verify that it advances

storage accesses at the

RDR for improper parity.

f

This test repeats until halted by the operator (if

accessed via DCP1). When accessed by the bring up

program,

it is not repeated.

ROS Read CRC Loop Test -CMD 3

C ROS READ

EXEC -

The ROS test checks if the machine can address and

fetch data from each

ROS module relating to the

language (APL or BASIC)

of the machine. While the test

runs, each byte

of data in each ROS module is read and

CRC sums are generated and compared. Compare

failures, end the test, and post

an error on the display.

Parity errors from the

ROS adapter are detected on the

bus

in to the control unit and cause a process check.

Before executing this routine, the

read/write storage

must be set

to zero at locations 0100 through 010D.

Refer

to the DCP1 alter function for the procedure. Exit

from

DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing RESTART.

(

correctly. Send and read back continues until 12

different

ROS addresses are used for the selected

language (BASIC

or APL). This test loops until halted by

the operator (if called via DCP1). When called by the

bring up program,

it does not loop.

Read/Write Storage Test -CMD 5

C RAM TEST

EXEC -

This routine stores data in all locations of read/write

storage and then reads it all out and compares it one

address at a time.

It then shifts the data one position

and loops on the test.

If allowed to run, all read/write

storage addresses are tested for each possible data

combination. The

test runs until the operator stops it by

using the

CMD and ATTN key combination. Either a

process check or a customer halt condition can occur.

RFLO (register F in level 0) (refer to

Display Registers

in

this section) contains the storage location that was

being addressed at the time

of the failure. The

suspected

read/write storage card that caused the

failure

can be identified by using the following table:

0000

to 3FFF K2, K4 (read/write storage) cards

4000

to 7FFF L2, L4 (read/write storage) cards

8000

to BFFF M2, M4 (read/write storage) cards

COOO to FFFF N2, N4 (read/write storage) cards

The

read/write storage cards K2, L2, M2, and N2 are

the even addresses and card

K4, L4, M4, and N4 are

the odd addresses. Exit from

DCP1 diagnostic mode by

pressing RESTART.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3·25

Tape to Storage Dump -CMD 8

C LOAD MEM@

FILE#

SELT

EXEC -

This routine can be used to load DCP2 directly from

tape

or to copy individual files.

• To load DCP2:

1. Load DCP1 -diagnostic mode.

2. Insert the CE diagnostic cartridge.

3. Enter C CMD

S.

4. Enter the read/write storage location, MEM@

OSOO.

5. Enter the tape file number, FILE# 0001 (number

in hex).

6. Enter storage selection, SEL T 0000.

7. Press

EXECUTE.

S.

Enter BR

OSOO.

9. Press EXECUTE to run DCP2.

• To copy individual files or

to load a file into storage:

1. Press and hold the CMD key.

2. Press the -(minus) key.

3. Press and hold the CMD key.

4. Press the x

or

*

(multiply) key.

5. Press the C key.

6. Press and hold the CMD key.

7. Press the S key.

S. Enter the read/write storage location, MEM@

OSOO.·

9. Enter the tape file number, FILE# xxxx (number

in hex).

10. Enter the storage selection, SEL T 0000.

11. Press the EXECUTE key.

The file number specified in step 9 is

now loaded in

memory starting at position

OSOO.

See

Storage Dump

to

Tape -CMD

9 in this section to load this file onto

another tape.

3-26

Storage Dump to Tape -CMD 9

C DUMP MEM@ _

END@ -

F I LE#-

TYPE-

SELT

EXEC -

This routine dumps storage from

M~M@

to END@

onto the tape cartridge, FILE# (hex),

if the TYPE is

identified. There are two types of files that can be

dumped:

Type 0011 is the tape copy function that labels the

tape file header on the tape you are copying to. This

is the same header found on t!le tape you are

copying from.

Type

OO4S is the. storage dump function that labels

the tape file header on the tape you are writing.

SEL T is the storage selection number. The SEL T for

read/write storage is 0000. The SELT for APL ROS is

0004. The SEL T for BASIC ROS is

OOOS.

The tape

receiving the dump must be marked properly.

This procedure should be used

to obtain a read/write

storage dump when submitting an MTR (microcode

trouble report), or

if you cannot obtain a storage dump

with the CMD 9 function.

The data is written in the first unused file. The file type

created is 72, which is the MTR file type.

To dump all

of the data in read/write storage to tape:

1. Insert a tape that is initialized and marked for a file

large enough

to contain the data (must be a

minimum of 16K). The tape dump program looks

for the first unused file of 16K or more.

2.

Hold CMD and press HOLD.

3.

Hold CMD and

press/

-+

(divide) key on the

numeric keyboard.

4. Displays DCP1 diagnostic mode when the

operation is complete. Press RESTART

to initialize

the 5100 Portable Computer and continue.

Tape Copy Procedure

CAUTION

You can use this procedure to copy individual files,

except 8, 9, and 15, from the CE diagnostic cartridge. If

files 8, 9, and 15 are copied, MDls 860 and 891 tests

(average velocity and peak shift head azimuth) might be

inaccurate.

To copy individual files from storage to tape, use the

following procedure:

1. The file to be copied from storage must have been

previously loaded using the CMD 8 function; or

it

must already be in the storage locations you

specify.

Press and hold the CMD

k~y.

If you are already in DCP1 diagnostic mode, go to

step 7.

Press the -(minus) key.

Press and hold the CMD key.

Press the x or

*

(multiply) key.

Press the C key.

Press and hold the CMD key.

Press the 9 key.

Enter the starting

read/write storage location,

MEM@0800.

Enter the ending read/write storage location,

END@

FFFF.

Enter the file number, FILE# xxxx (number in hex).

Enter the file type (0011

if copying from another

tape or 0048

if dumping from storage to a tape).

T 0000.

Enter the storage selection,

SEL

Press the EXECUTE key.

2.

3.

To copy

an entire tape, use the tape copy program on

the customer support cartridge. The tape copy program

is called via the PATCH program using )PATCH (APL) or

PATCH (BASIC). .

To repair individual files on a

CE diagnostic tape, use

the following procedures:

1. Use the C CMD 8 function to store the desired file

in

read/write storage at location 0800.

Insert the tape cartridge to be repaired.

Enter C CMD 9.

Enter the beginning storage location (0800) and

the end storage location

(FFFF).

Note: Error E80 010 is a normal ending error.

12.

5. Enter the tape file number in hex that was loaded

from the good tape

(0001 -001 F), and the file type

number (0011

J.

Enter the storage selection (0000).

Press EXECUTE. The sequence of C CM D 8 and

C CMD 9

can be repeated for each of the files on

the

CE diagnostic cartridge.

Return to DCP1 diagnostic mode by pressing

ATTN.

Exit from

DCP1 diagnostic mode, after copying the

tape, by pressing RESTART.

Insert the repaired tape cartridge and verify that it

is fixed.

13.

(

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

2.

3.

It

4.

11.

6.

14.

15.

7.

(

8.

9.

(

10.

The file that was

in the storage positions specified in

steps 10 and 11 has now been loaded on the tape in

the file number specified in step 12. This procedure, in

conjunction

with CMD 8 function, allows you to load

files into storage

from one tape and then dump them

onto another tape.

It is also useful in checking

suspected files that may contain CRe errors. By loading

the file into storage (using CMD 8), the CRC and data is

verified

for parity.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-27

To tape errors while using the customer support

cartridge that is prior

to ECS32655, use this patch to

halt the machine and display the status while running

the tape copy functions:

1.

Load the customer support cartridge.

2.

Begin the tape copy.

3.

Press the HOLD key.

4. When the machine halts, alter

OFOA to 0000.

5. Hold the CMD key down and press the

+

(plus)

key

to continue to tape copy.

6. When

an error occurs, the system will hang.

7. Display 2542-Look for current device address

(E20, E40, or ESO).

S. Display 254E-Error code (return code internal

format).

9. Display 255E-Error code (return code internal

format).

For example: Error code 1 B1 D

=

tape cmd error 002.

Refer

to the Tape

IOCB

and the 5100

Internal

Code

Chart

in section 6 of this manual.

TAPE RESIDENT PROGRAMS

This third group of diagnostic programs in the IBM 5100

Portable Computer maintenance package is

for

diagnosing I/O problems other than reading failures by

the tape unit.

If the bring up program finished without error and the

DCP1 tape read program also ran correctly, the problem

on the 5100 is probably an I/O problem. Of course, the

I/O might not be at fault if the problem is intermittent.

If an intermittent failure is suspected, DCP1 can be used

to loop on the bring up program or to rerun the tape

read program.

3·28

There are three ways to determine intermittent I/O

failures in the maintenance procedure.

1. From MAP 200.

2.

From MAP 900.

3.

Directly (in this case, you must be familiar with. the

5100 Portable Computer maintenance package and

be confident that the 5100 has

an I/O problem).

In any case, the part

of the 5100 Portable Computer

causing the failure can be found by following the

procedures in DCP2 along

with the instructions on the

display. DCP2 (the first file on the

CE diagnostic

t

cartridge) is loaded automatically into

read/write storage

at the completion of the tape read program. The various

MAPs and diagnostics integrated (M DI) (the remaining

files on the

CE diagnostic cartridge, part 160S705) are

loaded into

read/write storage by the CE using DCP2.

Diagnostic Control Program 2 (DCP2)

DCP2 controls the loading and execution

of tape

resident programs.

Loading DCP2

To load DCP2, first enter the DCP1 diagnostic mode by

doing the following steps:

1. Hold the CMD key and press the HOLD key.

2. Hold the CMD key and press the -(minus) key on

the numeric keyboard.

3. Hold the CMD key and press the

*

or x key on the

numeric keyboard.

The words DIAG DCP1 are displayed on line 1 at this

point.

4. Press the C key.

5. Hold the CMD key and press the 1 key on the

numeric keyboard.

Note: See the CMD 0 routine in

DCPl Diagnostic

Mode in this section.

6. Press

EXECUTE.

7. Follow the instructions on the display.

(

After completing the tape read program, the first file of

the CE diagnostic cartridge is loaded into read/write

storage and the following information is displayed:

DCP2

MENU

800 PRINTER MDI

820

COMMUNICATIONS/SERIAL I/O MDI

840 AUXILIARY TAPE MDI

860 TAPE WRITE MDI

(

890

DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINE CHART

ENTER THE MDI NUMBER

§fATUS:

ENTER

ENTER

'0'

IF

REPLY

THE OPTIONS

TO BE

ARE

RUN

TO BE DISPLAYED

XXX XXX is tne current EC number of this CE diagnostic cartridge.

The leftmost dash before the words

ENTER THE MOl

NUMBER TO

BE RUN flashes to indicate the position of

the next character to be entered from the keyboard. The

procedure

for entering the MOl number is found under

MOl in this section.

(

MOl (MAPs and Diagnostics Integrated)

MOl is MAPs and diagnostic programs integrated into a

single maintenance approach. MOl,

with the display and

the keyboard, allows you

to isolate machine failures by

responding

to information on the display screen.

Questions on the display require a response via the

keyboard. The MOl goes

to the next question or section

based on the keyboard input.

Loading MOl Sections

To load MOl sections, select the section from the OCP2

menu, enter the section number, and press EXECUTE.

An 0 {letter) can be entered along with the

MOl

sections number (but on the next line) to select a special

option or

to alter a previously selected special option.

Then, pressing

EXECUTE displays the MOl options.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-29

It is possible to enter and run MOl numbers not

appearing on the menu because the listed MOl sections

are subdivided into sections each having its own

number. These MOl sections are discussed

in greater

detail later. Subsections are used with some

of the

options mentioned

in the previous paragraph.

CAUTION

Entering these numbers directly runs the MOl out of its

normal sequence and. therefore. might give false results.

You should be familiar with the MOl options before

using this technique.

After you select the MOl number from the menu and

press

EXECUTE. the 5100 Portable Computer

automatically loads the MOl from the

CE diagnostic

cartridge and begins running it. As the MOl runs. the

steps

of MOl appear on the display screen.

The

MOl either runs to completion with no errors

detected and with no intervention required.

or it stops to

allow action. In this case. read the display to determine

the appropriate action. which includes the following:

Replace FRUs

Make an adjustment

Probe a logical level

Meter voltages

Exchange FRUs

Make

an observation

If a question is asked. answer it before pressing

EXECUTE

to continue. The format of the display with

several examples follows.

3-30

(

/

DCP2 Menu

MDI (MAP Diagnostic Integration)

(

Loading:

1. Select

the MDI section number from the DCP2 menu.

2. Enter

the MDI section number.

3.

Press the EXECUTE key.

This procedure loads and

automatically runs the MDI.

To stop the MDI and return to the MDI options, press the ATTN key.

The following message might appear if

the MDI halts:

ENTER Y OR N (B,

0,

T)

Y

Refers

to an answer to a specific question on the display

N

=

Yes}

=

No

screen. Enter

the appropriate answer and press the

EXECUTE key.

B

=

Back:

You can

enter B or BXX and press the EXECUTE key.

XX is the number of steps you want to back up in the

trace table.

0=

Option:

You can

enter

0

and press the EXECUTE key to display

the MDI options.

T

=

Trace:

You can

enter T and press the EXECUTE key to display

the

s~eps

that were executed along with the decision

(Y

or N) that was displayed. To obtain a

c~py

of the

trace table, press the key, press and hold the

CMD key, and press the; key.

I

I

I

MDI ran OK. Intervention required. Read

RESTART

(

"--Return to MAP

the display and take the

or

appropriate action.

press ATTN

key twice and

select

the next

MDI:

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3·31

DCP2

I

MOl Options

Loading:

1.

Select the MOl section from the DCP2 menu.

2. Enter the

MOl section number:

3. Press the

#

key.

4.

Enter the letter

0

(option).

5.

Press the EXECUTE key.

The

MOl option table is now on the display screen.

Note:

The

II

key will tab to the next entry instruction.

MODE:

STEP

Halts at each step and waits until the EXECUTE key is pressed to continue.

You can change the decision

of a step by keying in Y, N, B,

0,

or T.

RUN

(default selection) Runs

MOl automatically and halts when a question

must be answered.

NEXT STEP

NO: Enter the next step number to be executed. (If you are using the

loop on path option, you must enter the

stop number here.)

LOOP ON:

STEP

Allows looping on a specified next step number.

PATH

Allows looping on a path specified by the path start number and path

stop

number. The last step in the trace must be answered yes.

MOl

Allows looping a complete

MOl section in step and run mode.

UNTI L:(Use with loop on option)

Blank Loops until the

CMD and AnN keys are pressed (used with loop

on step).

YES

Loops until a yes decision

is obtained (used with loop on step).

NO

Loops

unti.1 a no decision

DIFFERENT

Loops until a decision different from the decision established

-

.

is obtained (used with loop on step).

by the trace

is obtained (used with loop on path or MOl).

PATH START NO: Defines the path start num,ber when loop on path

is selected.

PATH STOP NO: Defines the path stop number when loop on path is selected.

3-32

I '

MDI Display Format

(-

1

MOllO

STEP NO

I

2

XXXX

3

COMMAND TEXT AREA

4

QUESTION TEXT AREA

5

FIX TEXT AREA

6

7

SUPPLEMENTARY TEXT AREA

8

9

10

11

12

13

TEST -BITS

ON

14

MASK -

0300

INSTRUCTION AREA

15

RCVO -

0700

REPLY AREA

NEXT STEP NO. -

037

16

STATUS AREA

"-

I

Line

t

The name of the MOl and the step number that is currently running.

Lines

2-13

Contains the left

32

positions of the command text from the MAP. The right

32

positions

display

the supplementary text.

Lines

14, 15, 16

Instructions, replies, and status. The instructions are usually to press EXECUTE after entering

the reply (Y, N, B, 0, or T). Y means yes, N means no. The meaning of B-back, Q·option, T-trace

is explained later under

MDI Display Replies

in this section.

Supplementary Text Area

Line 2 The MOl section number (described under

Diagnostic Run Summary Chart

in this section).

Lines

12, 13, 14, 15

The bottom right of the display screen shows the data used to make the decision. TEST defines

the type of comparison used for the decision. The comparison is made between the data

defined by

MASK and RCVO. MASK is used to refer to either expected data or a mask for bit

comparisons. RCVO refers

to the data that is returned from the section and can be data, status,

or timing information.

MASK and RCVO refer to data strings between 1 and

24

characters.

The three classes of test are:

1.

Bit comparisons (bits on, bits off, bits not on,

bits

not off) compare the RCVO data against the

bits that are on in the mask. Zero bits in the mask

are

don't care bits.

2. Magnitude comparisons (low, high, equal, not equal,

less than or equal, greater than or equal) compare

the RCVO

data against the mask.

3. Within limits compares

that the RCVO data is with-

in the upper and lower limits specified by the mask.

A yes

or no decision is made based on these results.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-33

MOl

Message

Displays

The following message is displayed when a section was

run in step mode, the results

of the section were tested,

and a decision was made by the program based on the

results. (In this case, the decision is yes.) You

can

override this decision by entering an N or can also

select one

of the other options specified. When you

press

EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply and

proceeds accordingly.

1

IT[ST-

DECISION IS (Y,N,B,Q,T)

IMASK-

BITS

0300

ON

Y

I RCVIt-·

§T~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

INEXT STEP

0700

NO.-037

The following message is displayed when you must

manually answer the MOl question. You can answer yes

or no or select one of the other specified options.

When you press

EXECUTE, MOl interrogates the reply

and proceeds accordingly.

ENTER Y OR N (B,O,T)

§j~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

The following message is displayed when a remove,

replace, or adjust action (RRA) is required to correct the

failing

FRU or when a no trouble found (NTF) step is

reached. The reply defaults

to an 0, but one of the

other options can be selected. When you press

EXECUTE,

MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds

accordingly.

o

ENTER B,

0,

Ol~

T

§T~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

3-34

(

The following message is displayed when set up command

text is specified with an MOl test, when additional displays

of command text are required, when a GOTO STEP or

GOTO MAP is specified, or when a trace is displayed.

Pressing EXECUTE continues; however, if one of the op-

tions is entered before pressing EXECUTE, that option

is taken.

MOl Display Replies'

T

=

Trace -Displays the trace of the steps that were execu-

ted and the decision, yes

(V) no (N), associated with each

step. (A

go to step is designated by a G, where the G means

go

to a step within the same MOl.)

The trace

is erased

whe~

an MOl subsection is called. For

example,

MOl 800 has an MOl section 801. The MOl sub-

section

is called automatically as MOl 800 is executed.

But,

as you step through the MOl 800, you can see the

PRESS EXECUTE(B,O.T) TO

CONTINU~

§T~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

The following message is displayed when additional dis-

plays are needed

to show the entire trace table (256 steps

maximum). The reply defaults

to a T, but one of the

other specified options can be selected. When you press

EXECUTE,

MOl interrogates the reply and proceeds

accordingly.

ENTER T(D,D) TO CONTINUE TRACE

T

§f~TUS:

ENTER REPLY

The following message is displayed when a test is running.

You are instructed

to probe pins or .observe an opera-

tion. The diagnostic test runs until ATTN

is pressed, then

the MDI question message appears.

PRESS -ATTN-TO REPLY

~:;l

(:,

TUS:

I~UNN

I

Nei

(~/

(/

message on the display

that the MOl subsection will be

called

if you press EXECUTE. That is the last time you

can call the trace for

MAP 800 before it is erased.

While

in trace mode, 80 steps can be displayed on one dis-

play screen at a time.

If the trace contains more than 80

steps it is displayed on multiple display screens and EXECUTE

must

be pressed to page through multiple displays.

B

=

Back -Backs up one step in the MOl. A decimal num-

ber between 2 and

99 can be entered following the B to

back up more than one step at a time. Execution begins

at the step number you specified. If the number entered is

greater than the number of steps executed, the first step in

the trace is selected.

.you cannot back

out of an MOl program. If you are in

an MOl subsection, then you must return to the OCP2'menu

to return the previous MOL The previous MOl is called from

the OCP2 menu

by entering the MOl number and pressing

EXECUTE.

o

=

Option -Returns to the MOl options display so you can

enter new options. Pressing ATTN returns the OCP2 menu.

Returning Control

While the MOl is running, pressing the ATTN key returns

the

MOl option display. Pressing the ATTN key a second

time returns the OCP2 menu and pressing the ATTN key

a third time returns the

OCP1 diagnostic mode.

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-35

MDIOptions

The options are aCcessed through the MOl options display by

pressing EXECUTE. The instructions

on how to call the

MOl options are provided on the display. The exception

to this is if you are in an MOl section that does not have

the

MOl

~ptions

as one of the display replies. In that

case, press ATTN, or hold CMO and press ATTN, to get

to the MOl options display. An illustration of the MOl

options display is shown below.

CAUTION

If you are using the MOl options on MOl 840 or 844,

remove the

CE diagnostic cartridge and do not insert it

until instructed

to do so on the display. The tape might

,

J

I

be

erased if inserted too soon.

MDI OPTIONS

MODE:::

1-51'['j:L

RUN

I

NEXT STEP NO. :::. __ .... _

I-RUN -I

LOOP ON -I

. I-STEP-I

1-UNTIL

-I

PATH START NO,·=_ ......... .

I-PATH-I

I-YES-------I

1-

I-MDI -I

I-NO

I-DIFFERENT-I

-I

PATH STOP NO, = __ . __

PRESS

PRESS

-(CMD)ATTN-TO STOP LOOPING

PRESS

-ATTN-

-EXECUTE-

TO RETURN

TO CONTINUE

TO DCP2

WITH THIS MDI

STATUS: ENTER REPLY

Mode:

Defaults to run if step is not entered.

Loop On:

Loop on options are intended to diagnose inter·

mittent problems. (Pressing

HOLD while looping might

STEP -Displays the results

of each test and waits until

cause a PROCESS CHECK.)

EXECUTE

is pressed before continuing to the next test.

It

is used to step through each step in the MOL You can

STEP -Loops

on the step specified by NEXT STEP NO.

alter each decision in step mode. The

MOl remains in

until CMD and ATTN are pressed or until one of the

step mode until manually changed

to run mode.

selected termination options of the until function is

met.

RUN -Proceeds automatically through the MOl per-

forming the designated

test and displaying the results.

PATH -Loops on the path specified by the PATH

"The run function stops and waits for EXECUTE to be

START NO. and PATH STOP NO. when the DIF-

pressed only when a question must be answered by the

FERENT option

is selected.

CE or when a fix is displayed.

MOl -Loops on the entire MOl when the DIFFERENT

Next Step No.:

Selects the MOl step number to be executed

option

is selected.

next. You have the option

of selecting any step within the

MOl (001-nnn). If an invalid step number is entered, an

error message

is displayed.

3-36

Until:

Looping termination options. Blank, YES, and NO

should

be

used with loop on STEP. DIFFERENT should

(

be

used with loop on PATH or loop on MOL These options

are recognized only when one

of the loop on options is

selected.

Blank (option field left blank) -Loops until

CMD and

ATTN are pressed, then returns

the MOl options to the

display screen.

YES -Loops until a yes decision for a diagnostic test

is obtained, at which time the screen describing the

current

MOl step is displayed, or until CMD and ATTN

are pressed giving the same results

as blank.

(

NO -Same as YES except loops until obtaining a no

d~cision

for a diagnostic test.

DIFFERENT -First a trace must be defined by pro-

ceeding through

the desired sequence of steps in the

MOl or path. Then the program loops on the predeter-

mined sequence of steps until the current sequence,

varies from

the predetermined sequence. When the loop

terminates, the last valid step of the sequence is dis-

played along with

the decision that varied. Question

steps are assumed

to have the same response each time

through

the loop as they had when the initial trace was

defined; therefore,

they do not have to be answered

each time.

Path Start No:

Defines the beginning step of the path.

Path

Stop

No:

Defines the ending step of the path.

(

Stepping and Looping

Step Through MOl

MODE

=

STEP

STEP -Displays the results

of each test and waits until

EXECUTE

is pressed before continuing to the next test.

It

is used to step through each step in the MOl. The CE

can alter each decision in step mode. The MOl remains

in step mode until manually changed to run mode.

NEXT STEP NO.

=

XXX

Loop On Step

MODE

=

STEP

STEP -Loops on

the step specified by NEXT STEP NO.

until CMD and ATTN are pressed or until one of the selec-

ted termination options of the until function

is met.

NEXT STEP NO.

=

XXXX

LOOP ON-STEP

UNTIL-blank, YES,

NO, DIFFERENT

5100 Diagnostics Overview 3-37

Loop On Path

PATH -Loops

on the path specified by the PATH START

NO. and PATH STOP NO. when the DIFFERENT option is

selected.

Answer the questions exactly as they were answered

on

the initial pass through the path.

No intervention is required for the program to loop con-

tinuously. Howevet, a trace

of the desired sequence of

steps must first be created by proceeding through the path

before

the DIFFERENT option can be used correctly. The

DIFFERENT option uses the trace table

as a guide.

To use the loop

on PATH until DIFFERENT option:

1. With DCP2 loaded and the option menu displayed,

enter the selected

MOl number along with 0 for

options, and press EXECUTE. This initializes the

trace.

2. Enter STEP mode, then enter the path starting step

number into NEXT STEP

NO.

3. Press EXECUTE. This begins execution of the step

selected by NEXT STEP NO.

4. Proceed through the path steps answering those steps

that require intervention until you reach the desirecl

path stopping step. This builds

the trace of the steps

in the path. The last step must be answered yes.

5. Press ATTN

to return to the MOl options.

6. Enter:

RUN mode

NEXT STEP

NO. (use PATH STOP NO.)

loop on PATH until DIFFERENT

PATH START

NO.

PATH STOP NO.

7. Press EXECUTE to begin looping.

8. Press

(CMO) ATTN to stop looping. This returns to

the MOl OptiONS display where new options can

be

selected. To resume looping, press EXECUTE with-

out changing the options.

9. Looping stops

if the sequence of step execution

deviates from the initial sequence. The last executed

step

is displayed along with the decision that varied.

The looping options are cleared automatically so

that

pressing EXECUTE proceeds to diagnose the error

that occured.

3-38

Loop On MOl

MOl

-Loops on the entire MOl when the DIFFERENT

option

is selected.

Answer

the questions exactly as they were answered on the

initial pass through the MOL

No intervention is required for the program to loop con-

tinuously. However, a trace of

the desired sequence of

steps must first be created by proceeding through the

MOl

before the DIFFERENT option can be used correctly. The

DIFFERENT option uses the trace table

as a guide.

To use the loop on MOl until DIFFERENT option:

1. With DCP2 loaded and the option menu displayed,

enter the selected MOl number, and press EXECUTE.

This initializes the trace and begins running the

MOL

2. Proceed through the MOl answering the steps that

require intervention until the last step in the MOl is

reached. This builds the trace of the sequence of

steps that were executed. The last step must be

answered yes.

3. Press T and EXECUTE

to display the trace table.

Record the first and last steps from

the trace table

for the

MOl being run.

j

4. Press ATTN

to return to the MOl options.

5. Enter:

RUN ,mode, (do not change the NEXT STEP NO.)

loop on MOl until DIFFERENT

6. Press EXECUTE

to begin looping.

7. If looping does not start, repeat steps 2 through 6.

8. Press

(CMO) ATTN to stop looping. This returns to

the MOl options where new options can be selected.

To resume looping, press EXECUTE without chang-

ing the options.

9. Looping stops

if the sequence of step execution

deviates from the initial sequence. The last executed

step

is displayed along with the decision that varied.

The looping options are cieared automatically so

that

pressing EXECUTE proceeds to diagnose the error

that occurred.

MOl Subsections 890 Diagnostic Sections

The printer, auxiliary tape, and diagnostic sections MDls

on the DCP2 menu, are subdivided into individually

numbered subsections. These are especially useful

with

the MDI options previously described. In addition, they

can be entered directly into the DCP2 menu.

CAUTION

Entering MDI subsection numbers directly into the DCP2

menu runs

the MDI out of its normal sequence and can

These diagnostic sections allow you to select individual

MDI sections for diagnosing intermittent problems. The

diagnostic sections are normally run automatically under

control

of the MDI supervisor when tape write, printer,

auxiliary tape, and communications

MDI function MAPs

are executed. They can be run individually

by using the

diagnostic sections (890) and the following loading

instructions.

cause erroneous results.

(

A list

of the MDls and their subsections follows:

800 5103 Printer MDI Exercisor

801 Error Determination

802 Error Determination

803 Error Determination

804 Error Determination

805 Error Determination

820 Communications/Serial

I/O MDI

No MDI subsections

840 Auxiliary Tape

MDI

840

841

842

843

844

845

846

847

860 Tape Write MDI

861

890 Diagnostic Sections

891

892

893

894

(~.

Loading Instructions:

Load Diagnostic

DCP1 :

1.

Hold the CMD key and press the HOLD key.

2.

Hold the CMD key and press

the -(minus) key

on the numeric keyboard.

3.

Hold the

CMD key and press the

*

or x key on

the numeric keyboard.

The words DIAG

DCP1 are displayed on line 1 now.

4.

Press the C key.

5. Hold the CMD key and press the 1 key on the

numeric keyboard.

Note: See the CMD 0 routine in DCP1.

6.

Press EXECUTE.

7.

Follow the instructions on the display.

5100 Diagnostics Overview, 3-39

After the tape read programs are completed, the first

file of the CE diagnostic cartridge is loaded and the

OCP2 menu is displayed.

8. Select 890 from the OCP2 menu.

9. Press EXECUTE.

10. MOl allows the selection of the subsection

function (tape write, printer, auxiliary tape,

or

communications) to be exercised. Reply to the

appropriate question and press

EXECUTE.

11. The first step of each chart (MOls 891-894)

displays the section number, a brief description,

and the calling step number

of each diagnostic

section available. The calling step number is

also listed with each diagnostic section

description that follows later

in this section.

Record the step number listed

for the specified

diagnostic section, press

0

(option) and press

EXECUTE

to display the MOl options.

12. Enter

STEP, the step number as recorded in

number

11 above, and one of the loop on

options. Press

EXECUTE to begin.

13. The diagnostic section displays status

and/or

data as described under

MOl Display

Format.

Expected data or status is usually all

0' s to

force a Y decision for the MOl step. All N

decisions should be overridden by the operator

by keying in a Y

or an 0 (option) to avoid

running

an unwanted diagnostic section. Keying

in

an 0 to override either a Y or an N allows

immediate selection

of another diagnostic

section step or allows a looping option within

the same chart. A Y decision goes

to the first

step

of the chart to allow selection of another

diagnostic section step number. Return

to 11

above.

14. To stop, hold CMO and press ATTN. The MOl

options are displayed. Option and step numbers

can be selected

if desired. Pressing ATTN

again returns the

OCP2 menu.

3-40

,

,--

/

/

Diagnostic Program Routines

(

Routine numbers are displayed on the CRT during step

mode and, in many cases, during normal run mode. You

can use the routine numbers

in two ways:

1.

To locate (using MOl step mode) and loop on a

step within a specific test. You can do this using

the

MOl procedures.

2. To locate a specific test via MOl 890.

The following chart provides

an explanation of the test

and also shows the MOl 890 step number. Step

numbers are also displayed while running MOl 890.

(

(

(/

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-41

TAPE READ TEST AND AUXILIARY TAPE

DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES

These routines are used in MOls 840 through 847 and

MOl 893. The routine numbers

are the numbers used in

MDls 840 through 847. All tests with error codes return

0000.

Routine

Number Description Error Code Meaning

,

1

TR01

I.

TR02

TR06

TR07

3-42

Select subdevice test. This test is run as the first test in 0901 Failure of the F reset

MDls 840-847 and should be run in 893 before any other

command.

test. The first time this test is run

it asks you to enter the

subdevice address

with minimal error checking. Therefore.

because you enter the subdevice address.

840-847 and 893

can be run on any tape subdevice.

0903 Failure

of the subdevice

select command.

0906 Improper response

of the

subdevice.

Loop write read (LWR)

of data to the base I/O card only. 0909 Incorrect data read back.

for tape read test. and LWR of data to the tape adapter card

for auxiliary tape test.

Returns

to the MOl section the last error code that occurred 0954

Neither BOT nor

EOT status

when TR061 was run. This test is used only

in the auxiliary

is active.

tape tests.

not in tape read program.

0957

EOT status is not active.

0958

EOT status cannot be

cleared.

0960 BOT status is

not active.

0963

The load point hole (BOT

status) cannot be found (refer

to 229

for load point hole).

0966 BOT status cannot be

cleared.

Reads and compares file 1 on the diagnostic tape for correct 0994

Data read is not correct.

data using the

I/O supervisor.

Error codes 0009 and 0010 are used

to determine the end of 0001-0008 See error codes and halt

file 1 and indicate correct operation. Tape read branches

to 0011-0014 conditions in this section.

OCP2 if the operation is correct.

'

j

Routine

Number Description

Error Code Meaning

(~

(

r

"

(

(

(

TR08

Tests interrupts

from the tape control card. 0907

TR10 Returns the last error code that occurred

to the MOl section.

0982

This test is used only in the auxiliary tape tests, not in tape

read program.

0983

0985

0986

0987

0988

0989

TR39 Determines if the diagnostic mode line is active when it 0939

should not

be active. If it is active, eight read clocks are

generated by the tape control card, which,

in turn, causes an

interrupt from the base I/O (F2) card when one is not

expected.

TR40 Checks to determine if the tape clock line and write enable 0940

line become active and

that the read clock line is not an

open circuit. Every time the write enable line shifts, the read

clock line should pulse and cause an interrupt from the base

I/O (F2) card.

TR43

Checks the diagnostic mode line by changing it between 0943

write and read operations.

TR46 Tests the missing interrupts

for wrap through read/write 0946

head. This tests the tape control card detector circuits. The

select channel line is changed between channel 0 and

channel 1 ten times and

at least three interrupts must occur.

Interrupts occurred

incorrectly.

Status Error -Beginning of

tape status active once, but

not active now.

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock)

detected.

from either tape track.

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock) detected

from tape track 0 (format

track).

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock) detected

from tape track 1 (data

track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) detected on

tape track 0 (format track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) detected on

tape track 1 (data track).

Read Dsta Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) on either tape

track.

An interrupt occurred.

No interrupts occurred.

No interrupts occurred.

Less than three interrupts.

Diagnostic Program Routines 343

Routine

Number

TR47

Description

E"or Code

Meaning

All 1's or O's read from tape

control card.

/--

Checks the read data line to determine if it will go both 0947

-active and inactive. The program generates 10 read clocks

on the tape cOhtrol card

and reads the data associated with

th~se

read clocks .. There must be at least one 0 bit and one

t

bit read for this test to pass. A stuck bit causes all1's or.

all O's to be 'read.

Moves tape forward for two seconds. 0970

"'--

TR051

1

BOT or EaT was found; use

TR051 or TR052 routines to

reposition the tape.

"'--_/

TR052

1

TR06P,

Moves tape backward for two seconds.

Checks the beginning (BOT) and end (EOn of tape status

0954

indicators. The tape is moved past the single BOT holes and

the double

BOT/EaT holes.

If the test fails, the tape stops immediately.

0957

0958

0960

0963

EaT status is not active.

EaT status cannot be

cleared.

BOT status is

not active.

The load point hole (BOT

status) cannot be found (refer

to 229 for load point hole).

/

Neither BOT nor

EaT status

is active.

~~"

'.

0966

CAUTION

If an error occurs and the test is retried, the tape might 'go

off the end of the reel.

TR73

2

Tests the tape speed to determine if the motor speed is 0973

correct. The program rewinds the tape to the first set of

double holes and counts the time. When the load point hold

is found, the time is compared.

Remove the tape cartridge from the tape unit and attach a

jumper between tape control card pin U06

(-write enable)

and pin U08 (gnd). Wraps data through the base I/O card

and tape control card.

0995

BOT status cannot be

cleared.

-"

,

Tape speed not close to 40

inches per second.

TR95

The data returned was

incorrect.

0996

Indicates

that TR95 ran and

can be rerun by pressing

EXECUTE.

'If a 970 error results from the EOT hole t?eing in front of the tape mirror, manually move the tape to reposition the EOT hole.

2Looping on this test can cause a process check.

3-44

(,

(

Routine

Number

TR101

Description

Determines if both tape tracks return interrupts and if the

sync byte (hex

E7) can be read from both tracks.

Error Code

0982

Meaning

Status Error -BOT status

active once, but not active

now.

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock) detected

from either tape track.

Read Data Error -No

0983

0985

C~

0986

0987

0988

0989

l(

TR0312 Cartridge in place status (10) should not

be present. 0912

TR0315 File protect status (02) should be present. 0915

TR0318

LED on status (04) should be present.

0918

TR0321 BOT status (01) should

not be present; that is, sense bit (01) 0921

should

be on.

TR0324 EOT status (SO) should not be present. 0924

TR0327

Erase active (08) status should not be present.

0927

TR0330 Erase active (08) status for track 0 (format track) should be

0930

(.

present.

Note: This test leaves the erase coil on.

(j

interrupt (read clock) detected

from tape track 0 (format

track).

Read Data Error -No

interrupt (read clock) detected

from tape track 1 (data

track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) detected on

tape track 0 (format track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) detected on

tape track 1 (data track).

Read Data Error -No sync

byte (hex

E7) on either tape

track.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Bad sense bit found.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-45

Routine

Number Description, Error Code Meaning

TR0333

Erase

activ~(08)

status for track 1 (data track) should be 0933 Bad sense bit found.

present.

Note: This test leaves the erase coil on.

0936

Bad sense bit found.

TR0336

Select magnet active status (20) should not be

present.

TR0337

Select magnet active status

(20) for forward tape motion

0937

Bad sense bit found.

should be present,

Note: This test leaves the forward tape and select magnet

active commands on.

TR0338 Select magnet active status (20) for reverse tape motion 0939 Bad sense bit found.

should be present.

Note:

This test leaves the reverse tape and

select magnet active commands on.

,TR0348

Cartridge in place status (10) should be present.

0948

Bad sense bit found.

TR0349

File protect status (02) should be present.

0949

Bad sense bit found.

TR0350

EOT status (80) should not be present.

0950

Bad sense bit found.

3-46

/"

'~/

t

/

TAPE WRITE ROUTINES

(~

These routines are used in MOl 860. The routine

numbers are the numbers used in MOl 860.

XS

in the

chart mean any number.

(

Routine

Number

BT01

Description

Average Velocity Test -Positions

the tape

to the file containing 1's

Expected

Information

Error

Code

Meaning

The average speed is computed to

two decimal points and returned as a

xxxx

XXXX

Average Deviation

f

and then begins the bit timing

Velocity Number

analysis test.

BT02

Acceleration Test -Checks the

xxxx

speed

of the tape from stop to

1500 bits after the tape has

reached 20 inches per second.

Graph

BT03 Deceleration Test -Checks the

xxxx

speed

of the tape for the 1040 bits

after the drop

of the run line. This

speed should be less than 20

inches per second.

Graph

(

4-digit decimal number in inches per

second. For example, a received

number

of 4006 is actually 40.06

inches per second. The average

speed is taken from the average

of

9,192 bit times. The deviation number

is returned

as the third and fourth

bytes.

The speed at bit 800 is computed

to

two decimal points and returned. as a

4-digit decimal number in inches per

second. If the speed is not within the

range

of 38.1 to 41.9 inches per

second for bits 800 to 1500, then that

speed

is returned.

The speed

of the 1500 bits is

displayed

in a graph. The speed in

inches per second is the vertical axis

and the 1500 bits are the horizontal

axis.

Each asterisk

(*)

on the graph

represents the average speed

of 36

bits on tape.

The speed at bit 1040

is returned as

a 4-digit decimal number computed

to two decimal points in inches per

second.

A graph

of the speed of the 1040 bits

is displayed. The speed

in inches per

second is the vertical axis and the

1040 bits are the horizontal axis.

Each asterisk

(*)

on the graph

represents the average speed

of 26

bits on tape.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-47

Routine

Number Description

BT06

Erase Data on Both Tracks

Expected

Information

Error

Code Meaning

/

~

/

XXXXXXXXXXXX

(six 2-digit error

codes)

00-14 The program returns six error codes

of two digits each. The first four error

codes are expected

to be 00. If they

are not 00, they are the system error

codes,

02-14. Refer to

Error

Codes in

this section.

r---"

~

BT11 Peak Shift-Head Azimuth Test on

>

to

>

Track 0 using a prewritten pattern

(4-digit decimal

of O's and 1's from file 15 -This

number computed

to

test searches

to file 15, then reads two decimal places)

the data on track 0

in 10 bit timing

analysis mode. Speed differences

between the odd and

even bits

should not exceed 10.0

microseconds.

BT21

Acceleration Test for Customer

>

Media -This test goes to file 1

and does the acceleration test

using BT02.

348

The first error code is from a search

to file 30.

The second error code is

from a mark

command to mark two files of two

records each.

The third error code is from another

search

to file 30 and a write header

command

to this file.

The fourth error code is from a write

and read

of data to file 30.

The fifth error code is

from a read of

the data on file 30 after it was erased

during the read operation. This error

code should be 09. This is the first

error code expected

to be other than

00.

The sixth error code is from a search

for file 30 after the format track is

erased. This error code should be 04.

The data returned is the even average

and odd average bit time

for track 0

in microseconds (see BT34).

The average speed is computed to

two decimal points and returned as a

4-digit decimal number in inches per

second. For example, a received

number of 4006 is actually 40.06

inches per second. The average

speed is taken from the average

of

9,192 bit times. The deviation number

is returned

as the third and fourth

bytes.

'--

..

'

j

/

".

/'

Routine

Number Description

Expected

Information

Error

Code Meaning

(

BT22 Sense Test XX

BT23

Write

Read Test -Writes and XXX ... XX (up to

reads the data in the MASK field

twelve

2-digit bytes)

on the display onto tape.

(

f

BT30 Peak Shift Test on Track 1 -

>

to

>

Returns the track 1 data generated

(4-digit decimal

during routine BT48. BT48 runs number computed

to

now if it was not run previously. two decimal places)

BT31

Symmetry Test on Track 1 -

>

to

>

Returns the track 1 data generated

(4-digit decimal

during routine BT47. BT47 runs number computed

to

now if it was not run previously. two decimal places)

(

BT34 (See note) Return Oata to MOl for

Test Spec Function -This test is

not

an MOl routine but a

subroutine

of BT47, BT48, BT30,

and BT31. This test generates

an

even average number and puts it

into the first 4 digits

of the MASK.

A high number is generated by

adding the permissible difference

to the low average number and

putting this in the last 4 digits of

the MASK. The program also

:(

generates

an odd average number

into the RCVO.

Bits: T1

T2 T3 T4

T5

T6

Odd average

=

average of

T1, T3, T5, etc

(/

Even average

=

average of

T2, T4, T6, etc

Note: Not accessible from

MOl

('

Returns the sense byte from the tape

unit.

Returned data is the correct data if

there is no error, or the first data to

miscompare if there is an error. For

example, if the data 012345 is the

expected data,

012345 ... ,

for a total of

512 bytes is written onto tape, where

01 is one byte, 23 the next byte and

45 the next byte, then repeat.

If the

data on tape is

ABCOEF, ABCOEF is returned

as

RCVO on the display so that all 512

bytes need not

be displayed.

The data returned is the even average

and odd average bit time for track 1

in microseconds (see BT34).

The data returned is the even average

and odd average bit time for track 1

in microseconds (see BT34).

All data is in decimal microseconds.

For example,

if the averages

calculated are 33.00 (even average)

and 34.05 (odd average) and the

permissible difference is 3.0, the

information displayed is:

TEST -Within limits

MASK -3300-3600

RCVO -

3405

Diagnostic Program Routines 3,49

Routine

Number

BT35'

Description

EOT Hardware Stop Test -This

test is similar to TR061 in the

auxiliary tape and tape read

routines. The difference is that the

time~outs

are different to make

sure that

the EOT stop hard works.

Expected

Information

Error

Code

Meaning

No errors.

/-

'

.....

0000

0954-

0966

See TR061 for explanation of possible

error codes.

No errors.

"'-_/

I

BT36

Test Bit Timing Hardware (no tape

0000

J

cartridge inserted) -This rest

~-

requires two jumpers to run and

the tape cartridge must not be

inserted attach jumpers on tape

control card pin B08

to pin S05,

and pin U06

to pin U08. The test

writes data, therefore it erases the

tape. The test determines

if the bit

timing hardware produces correctly

timed interrupts.

0811

Not enough interrupts occurred.

0812

Inte~rupt

J

times are incorrect.

BT37 Check System and Diagnostic Error

XXXXXXXX(two The last two error codes that were

Code -Error codes are generated

4-digit error codes) given are returned by this program as

by the programs each time they an 8-digit number.

are run. This test is used to clarify

previous errors. No hardware is

The first 4 digits are the last system

exercised by this routine.

error code (02-14, see Error

Codes in

this section).

The last 4 digits are the last error

codes from the tape

write routines

(0800-0960

as described in the error

code column

of this chart).

BT47 Symmetry Test on Track 0 -

>

to

>

The data (see BT34) returned is the

Searches

to file 30 and writes

(4-digit decimal

even average and odd average bit

zeros on both tracks. The test then number computed

to times for track 0 in microseconds.

reads the data on both tracks in bit

two decimal places)

timing analysis mode. The

permissible difference in speed

between the odd and even bits

should

not be more than 3.0

microseconds.

, Looping on this test can cause a process check.

3-50

r---"

',-

./

/

C

Routine

Number

BT48

Description

Expected

Information

Error

Code

Meaning

The data returned is the even average

and odd average bit time for track 0

in microseconds (see BT34).

Peak Shift Test on Track 0 -This

xxxx

to XXXX

(4-digit decimal

test is similar

to BT47 but writes

an alternating pattern of O's and number computed to

1's. The permissible difference

of two decimal places)

the

O's and 1's can be a maximum

of 8 microseconds.

C'

BT51 Erase Coils Open Test

f

TR01 Select Subdevice Test -This test

is used in

MAP 891 (auxiliary tape).

It is not used for MAP 860. This

test must be run before

891 is run

on auxiliary tape. This test must

also be run

if the operator ever

If

returns to the DCP2 menu during

MAP 891. The first time this test

is run

it asks you to enter the

subdevice address

with minimal

error checking; therefore,

891 can

be run on any tape subdevice.

(--

(

0000 No errors.

0808 Status

bit 5 is on after an F reset

instruction.

0809 Status bit 5 is on after a hex F7

control instruction command (erase

channel 0).

0810

Status bit 5 is on after a hex

FB

control instruction command (erase

channel 0). Status bit 5 indicates

LED

and erase coils OK.

0000 No errors.

0901 F reset failure on a

get

microinstruction. The status was

other than

FF after an F reset

instruction.

0903

Subdevice select failure. The

expected status

bit was not active.

0906 Improper response from the selected

subdevice. The expected subdevice

response status

was not active.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-51

5103 PRINTER DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES

These routines are used in MOts 800 through 805. The

routine numbers are the numbers used in MDts 800

through 805. The expected information column in the

chart contains the following types of information:

SA= Status byte A

SB= Status byte B

Device

Address

Bits 4-7 Device Name Bits 8-15

Definition

5

Printer

If Ry is even, status byte A

8

Print emitter latch 3

9

Print emitter latch 2

10

Print emitter latch 1

11

Wire check

or not ready

12

Forms emitter B

13

Forms emitter A

14

Not end of forms

15

Left margin switch

or not ready

If Ry is odd, status byte

8

=

Print motor latch B (0

9

=

not B)

Print motor latch A (0 not A)

10

Print emitter interrupt

11

Not ready interrupt

12

Forms motor latch B

(0 = not B)

13

Forms motor latch A (0

=

not A)

14

80 cps

=

0, 120 cps

=

1

15

1.1 ms or 2.66 ms (120 cps) or,

1.1 rns or 3.3 ms (80 cps) timer

interrupt

EC = Error code

An error code is a

2-digit decimal number described

under

Error

Codes in this section.

PLFP

=

Print line failure position

The print line failure position is a

4-digit decimal

number between 0001 and 0132.

TS

=

Test status

Test status is either 00

or FF. 00 indicates a test failure

and

FF indicates a pass.

3-52

(

("

(

Routine

Number Description

PT03

Expected

Information

Error

Code

Meaning

Returns status bytes A and B. Turns off (resets) forms motor

XX

XX

latch A and forms motor latch B in SA SB

the printer adapter card (B1A2).

Turns on forms motor latch A.

Turns on forms motor latch B.

PT04

PT05

XX

SA

XX

SB

Returns status bytes A and B.

XX

SA

SB Returns status bytes A and

B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

MOl 892 returns status bytes A and

B.

XX

PT06

PT07

PT08

Turns on forms

motor latch A and

forms motor latch B.

Gets Status.

XX

SA

XX

SB

XX

SA

XX

SB

Spaces forms in increments of

XX XX

1/16 of a line. Sixteen increments

SA SB

are spaced (one line). Detects

open forms predriver lines

or an

open forms stepper motor winding.

Checks the 2.66 ms (120 cps)

timer

or the 3.3 ms (SO cps) timer

in the printer adapter card.

XX

EC

50-59 Returns status bytes A and B.

error code.

PT09

XXXX

0240-0284 (120 cps)

0310-0341

(SO cps)

Returns a four-digit number in the

RCVD data location as the interval

between timer pulses. A decimal is

implied between the second and third

digits.

Returns a four-digit number in the

RCVD data location as the interval

between timer pulses. A decimal is

implied between the second and third

digits.

Returns status bytes A and B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

Returns status bytes A and B.

C

PT10 Same as PT09 except checks the

1.1 ms timer.

XXXX

0102-0114

PT11

PT12

PT13

Turns print motor latch A and print

XX

XX

motor latch Bon.

SA

SB

Turns the print motor latch Bon.

Turns print motor latch A on.

XX

SA

XX

SB

XX

SA

XX

SB

(

PT14

PT15

Turns off print motor latches A and

XX XX

B. SA SB

Turns

off the forms go and print

go latches that disable the two

printer motors.

Same

as PT15 except status is

returned after 300 ms delay.

XX

SA

XX

SB

(

PT15A

XX

SA

XX

SB

Returns status bytes A and B.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-53

Routine Expected

Number Description

Information

I

PT16 Gets and saves status bytes A and XX XX

B the first time it is called and

SA

SB

returns that status on all

subsequent calls.

PT20

Prints four lines of alternating Hs XX XX

XX

and blanks. Terminates early

if an SA

SB EC

error code occurs.

PT21

Ripple Print with Underscore -

XX·

XX XX

Prints one line of all characters SA SB EC

without underscore and one line of

all characters with underscore.

Terminates early if an error occurs.

PT23 Staggered Print Test -Prints Hs in XX XX XX

an ever expanding pattern until 132 SA SB EC

Hs are printed in a single line.

Terminates early

if an error occurs.

PT26

Gets the last error code value. XX

EC

PT01V6

Spaces forms six lines and repeats

XX XX XX

this sequence six times (36 lines).

SA SB EC

PT01V15 Spaces forms 15 lines and repeats

XX XX XX

this sequence 6 times (90 lines).

SA SB EC

PT17V1 Drives the print head carrier to the XX

XX

right margin, then ramps.

If an SA

SB

error occurs, the routine gets the

XX XXXX

status, issues a ramp command,

EC PLFP

and terminates.

PT17V10 Same as PT17V1 except repeats

XX XX

10 times.

SA SB

XX XXXX

EC PLFP

PT25V1 Left Margin Timing Test -Moves

XX XX

carrier

to the .right 3.3 inches (83.8

SA SB

mm), then ramps. Checks

to

XX XX

determine if left margin drops

EC TS

between print emitters 1 and

2.

Terminates the routine and causes

TS (test status) to be 00 if an error

occurs.

3-54

Error

Code

Meaning

Returns saved status bytes A and

B.

50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B

and an error code.

50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B

and an error code.

50-59 Returns status bytes A and Band

aFI

error code.

50-59 Returns an error code.

50-59 MDI 892 returns two status bytes and

an error code. All other M Dis return

only

an error code.

50-59 MDI 892 returns status bytes A and B

and an error code. All other MOls

return only an error code.

50-59 MOl 892 returns status bytes A and

B, error code, and print line position

of the print head where the failure

occurred.

All other

MDls return EC and PLFP.

50-59 MOl 892 returns status bytes A and

B, error code, and print line position

of the print head where the failure

occurred.

All other MOls return

EC and PLFP.

50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an

error code, and test status.

(

"-...

/

........../

~

...

'",

.

/

'

;-

'

.

....

-/

Routine

Number

Description

Expected

Information

Error

Code Meaning

(-

PT25V5

Same

as PT25V1 except repeats

XX XX

five times

if there are no errors.

SA SB

XX XX

EC TS

(

PT25V10

Same

as PT25V1 except repeats

XX XX

10 times

if there are no errors.

SA SB

XX

XX

EC

TS

COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER/SERIAL I/O

ADAPTER PROGRAM AND DIAGNOSTIC

ROUTINES

When the Communications Adapter/Serial I/O Adapter

features are installed, the diagnostic program provides:

• A test

of all of the status and control circuitry on the

expansion feature card. The test further isolates

problems

to either the 5100 Portable Computer or

customer provided data set/communications facility.

• A test

of the long space interrupt and the timer

interrupt

of the Communications Adapter feature. The

long space interrupt detects an end of transmission

request form the remote facility. The timer interrupt

controls the data sampling and data transmission

rates.

,

r

50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an

error code, and test status.

50-59 Returns status bytes A and B, an

error code, and test status.

• A test

of the timer interrupt of the Serial I/O Adapter

feature. The timer interrupt controls the data

sampling and data transmission rates.

• A test

for each of the interrupt sources, both for the

ability

to set the interrupt via the hardware and reset

the interrupt via the microcode.

• Data tests of various bit combinations that isolate

problems between the 5100 Portable Computer and

customer provided modem/communications facility

using a manually attached wrap connector

to further

isolate problems

to the defective FRU in the 5100.

The diagnostic routines are used in MOl 820. The

routine numbers shown

in the following chart are used

in MOl 820.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-55

Routine

Returned

Information

Number Description

Status Data (hex)

Meaning

Routines COMOO through COM25 test the communications Adapter feature. Neither the data set nor the wrap

connector needs

to be attached for routines CO MOO through COM05.

CO MOO

Resets the expansion feature card.

COM01 Returns communications status.

XX

One byte of sense status.

COM02 Tests for timer interrupt in transmit 96 Good test.

mode.

COM03 Tests 134.5 bps timer interrupt

96

0200 through Good test.

rate. 02F2

Data is the rate in tens

of p.s. 00 0700 No interrupt occurred.

COM04

Tests 300 bps timer interrupt rate.

96

0147 through

Good test.

014E

Data is the rate

in tens of p.s.

00

0700 No interrupt occurred.'

COMOS Tests 1200 bps timer interrupt rate.

96

0381 through Good test.

0399

Data is the rate in tens

of p.s.

00

0700 No interrupt occurred.

The communications wrap connector must

be attached for routines COM06 through COM10.

COM06 Tests

for long space interrupt EF 1886 through Good test.

when long space received with

1800

terminal ready set.

00

61A8 No interrupt occurred.

COM07 Tests for inactive long space

00

Good test.

interrupt when continuous mark

received

with terminal ready set.

COM08 Tests

for inactive long space

00

Good test.

interrupt when short space

received with terminal ready set.

COM09 Tests that long space interrupt 87

Good test

for communications

reset command resets the interrupt adapter.

level and long space interrupt

status.

96 Good test for Expansion feature.

3-56

/

/

"'--

/

Routine Returned Information

(-

Number Description Status

COM10

Tests that the Expansion feature

86

reset command resets the interrupt

level and long space interrupt

status.

96

(

COM11

Tests that alternating bit patterns

can be transmitted and wrapped

back correctly.

COM12 Tests that all

O's pattern can be

(

transmitted and wrapped back

correctly.

COM13

Tests that all

1's pattern can be

transmitted and wrapped back

correctly.

COM14 Tests

for timer interrupt when start 97

bit received while in receive mode.

COM15 Tests

for inactive timer interrupt

00

when no start

bit received while in

receive mode.

COM16 Tests that dropping out

of receive

00

mode after a start

bit is received

prevents a timer interrupt.

ij

,-<;

'

"

COM17 Tests for an inactive timer interrupt

00

when a short start

bit is received

while

in receive mode with the

start

bit check enabled.

COM18

Tests

that a receive data bit can be 86

set and that the Expansion feature

reset command resets it.

96

03

COM19

Tests that data set ready and clear

E6

(

to send status bits can be set.

F6

(

Data (hex)

10 bytes

of AA

10 bytes of E1

10 bytes

or E2

10 bytes

of 00

10 bytes

of E1

10 bytes of E2

10 bytes of FF

10 bytes of E1

10 bytes of E2

Meaning

Good

test for communications

adapter.

Good

test for Expansion feature.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

Good test.

Good test.

Good test.

Good

test for communications

adapter.

Good

test for Expansion feature.

Bit cannot be set.

Good test for communications

adapter.

Good test for Expansion feature.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-57

Data set must be attached for routines COM20 through

COM25. These routines test the communications

network. The status

is displayed on the bottom line.

COM20 through COM25 routines

are used in MOl 894

only.

Routine

Number

COM20

COM21

Description

Transmits solid mark.

Transmits solid space.

Comments

Causes line disconnect if either' the transmitting or

receiving data set is strapped for a long space

disconnect.

COM22

COM23

COM24

COM25

Transmits 300 bps alternating bit pattern.

Transmits 134.5 bps alternating bit pattern.

Receives and analyzes 134.5 bps alternating bit

pattern.

Receives and analyzes 300 bps alternating bit

pattern.

Results

of the analysis are displayed in a graph with

decimal numbers.

Results of the analysis are displayed in a graph with

decimal numbers.

Routine

Number Description

Returned Information

Status Data (hex) Meaning

Routines 51001 through 51015 test the Serial I/O Adapter feature. Neither the I/O device nor the wrap connector

needs to

be attached for routine 51001 through 51006

51001

51002

51003

Returns serial

I/O adapter status. XX One

byte

of sense status.

Good test.

21 CA through

21E8

2710

1681 through

169F

2710

DB 38 through

OB56

2710

0009

2710

Good test.

No interrupt occurred.

Good test.

No interrupt occurred.

Good test.

No interrupt occurred.

Good test.

No interrupt occurred.

."

..

/

Tests for timer interrupt in transmit 96

mode.

Tests

FFFF timer interrupt rate

constant.

Data is the rate in tens

of

p.s.

96

00

96

00

96

00

96

00

51004 Tests

AAAA timer interrupt rate

constant

Data is the rate

in tens of p.s.

51005 Tests 5555 timer interrupt rate

constant.

Data is the rate in tens of p.s.

51006 Tests 004F timer interrupt

Data is the rate

in tens of p.s.

r'

3-58

(

(

('

Routine

Number Description

Returned Information

Data (hex)

Status

Meaning

The serial

I/O adapter wrap connector must be attached for routines 51007 through 51014.

51007

51008

Tests that data set ready and clear

F6

to send status bits can be set.

Tests that alternating bit patterns

can be transmitted and wrapped

back correctly.

Tests that all O's pattern can be

transmitted and wrapped back

correctly.

Tests that all 1's pattern can be

transmitted and wrapped back

correctly.

Tests for inactive timer interrupt

00

when no start bit received while in

receive mode.

Tests

for timer interrupt when start 97

bit received while in receive mode.

Tests that dropping out of receive

mode after a start bit is received

prevents a timer interrupt.

10 bytes of AA

10 bytes

of E1

1 0 bytes

of E2

10 bytes of 00

10 bytes

of E1

10 bytes

of E2

10 bytes of FF

10 bytes

of E1

10 bytes

of E2

Good test.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good Test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

Not timer interrupt.

Interrupts too frequent.

Good test.

51009

51010

51012

51011

51013

Good test.

Good test.

00

t

51014

Tests

for an inactive timer interrupt

00

when a short start bit is received

while in receive mode with the

start

bit check enabled.

Good test.

The serial I/O adapter wrap connector should not be attached for routine 51015. Probe pin 8 on the serial I/O

connector.

51015 Tests the '+receive line signal

detector' signal line.

The

CE probe UP light should be on.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-59

Error Codes

The CE diagnostic error codes are 800 through 999.

Refer

to

Diagnostic Program Routitles

in this section for

the error codes and their meanings.

The following list

of error codes are hardware related

only. The BASIC or APL language error codes are in the

APL or BASIC reference manual.

The display format

for hardware error codes is ERROR

xxx

yu.

and is displayed on line 15 of the display. The

xxx represents the error code, y represents the failing

device,

and zz represents the subdevice address.

'The subdevice address allows the 5100

to distinguish

,between

I/O devices using the same device address, as

in the case of the internal and auxiliary tape units.

The subdevice address

can be one of many addresses

depending

on the number and type of subdevices

attached. The subdevice addresses

for the tape units

are:

Internal tape unit -80

Auxiliary tape unit -

40

/

Customer Error Code Descriptions

(

Device

(

Tape

:(

'~

'J

.';"

,(

(~~

f."

Error Code Description

Device

Error

Address Subdevice

xx

y

Address zz

002 E

'Z2.

Invalid command for device or invalid sequence for device -

Incorrect device address or file number specified by the user.

003

E

z:z. Status error -Incorrect status sensed. The most recent status

byte is located at address hex 008F (refer

to

Status

under

Tape

Adapter I/O Lines

in Section 4).

004 E zz Time-out -Data cannot be found on tape, or a rewind operation

exceeded three minutes. (Data might not be found

if the tape is

positioned where there is no data or

if the tape unit failed.) A

time-out occurs during the rewind operation if the tape unit fails

to sense the load point hole. If the tape unit senses the larger

BOT /

EOT holes, the tape moves forward looking for the load

point hole until the

time-out occurs.

005 E zz Cartridge not inserted -With a cartridge inserted, status bit 3 is

0, but should be 1.

006

E

'Z2.

File protect -The file protect arrow is pointed to SAFE for a write

operation. Status bit 6

is sensed as a 1 but should be

a

(indicates

tape

can be written).

007 E zz Cyclic redundancy check error -The data track CRC is bad (refer

to

Error Checking

in Section 4). Obtaining a correct CRC requires

proper operation of a" read/write components in the tape unit.

An excessively used tape can cause 007 errors. Tape life is

several thousand head passes on a customer cartridge and

approximately 500 head passes on a

CE diagnostic cartridge.

008 E zz Records or files out of sequence -Format record sequence

numbers or header file numbers are not read

in the correct order

(refer

to

Tape Writing and Formatting

in Section 4).

009

E

'Z2.

End of data -End of data (hex 42) was read from the record type

byte

of a data record when end of data was not expected. The

tape unit is not usually the cause

of this error.

010 E

zz End of file -A read or write operation was attempted beyond the

last record on the file. The tape unit is not usually the cause

of

this error.

011 E zz

Specified file number cannot be found -A hex FF (end of marked

tape) was read from the header record file type byte before the

user specified file was found. The tape unit is not usually the

cause of this error.

012 E

'Z2.

Physical end of tape -EOT status bit

a

was sensed as a 1, which

indicates

an EOT hole was sensed. An incorrect number of files or

an incorrect file size can cause this error.

013 E

'Z2.

Tape unit not ready An incorrect device address was specified by

the user

for the tape unit or there was not status response from

the tape unit.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-61

Device

Error

Error Code

Device

Address Subdevice

y

Address zz

E

'ZZ

Description

,/

xx

Tape

(continued)

5103 Printer

014

"

Specified subdevice is not attached -An invalid subdevice was

specified by the user

or expected subdevice status was not

sensed.

Printer not attached -An incorrect device address was specified

by the user for the printer, or returned status on bus in was hex

FF.

End of forms -'+End of forms' line is down. This is caused by a

defective switch and associated circuits, a maladjusted switch, or

/-

"---~

013

5

00

i

050

5

00

!,

~i'

~;'

I

051 5

052 5

054

5

055 5

056 5

3-62

00

00

00

00

the absence of forms.

Printer not ready -Printer voltages (+24 Vdc or 10.8 Vdc) out of

tolerance or a wire check occurred with the print head at the left

margin.

Forms step time-out -A forms emitter pulse did not occur within

approximately

two seconds from the previous forms emitter pulse.

This timing does

not apply during the forms movement stopping

sequence.

00 Wire check -Indicates that a print wire driver was on too

long. If the print head is in the left margin and' -wire on' is

down, a

051 error occurs. If the print head is not in the left

margin and

'-wire on' is down, a 054 error occurs.

Undefined interrupt -'-Interrupt request 2' line is down but none

of the three interrupt bits from the printer adapter are on:

Print emitter interrupt Status byte B bit 2

Not ready Status byte B bit 3

1.1 ms or 2.66 ms(120

cps) timer or 1.1 ms or

3.3 ms (90 cps) timer

interrupt

Incorrect print emitter sequence -The current print emitter and

previous print emitter are out

of sequence. Print emitter sequence

when printing:

right is

1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1 etc

left is 3,

2, 1, 3, 2, 1, 3 etc

/--~

"-

j

Device

Error Code

Error

xx

Device

Address

y

5

Subdevice

Address zz

00

Description

("

5103 Printer

057

Missing print emitter pulses -A print emitter pulse was not found

(continued)

(

(

,

Tape

{

058 5

059 5

900 to E

999

00

00

xx

during the specified time (150

ms -SO cps, 100 ms -120 cps).

The print head stepper motor begins turning when it receives

pulses from the printer adapter. Error checking begins when the

print head stepper motor is up

to speed. If a print emitter pulse

does not occur during the 100 ms or 150 ms timing, a 057 error

occurs.

If a print emitter pulse does occur but is not the expected

pulse, a 056 error occurs. Refer to Print Emitter Error Timing

following these error codes.

Failures that prevent the carrier from moving (broken belt) cause a

057 error. Light mechanical binds or print emitter failure usually

cause a 056 error.

Timer interrupt time-out -Defective 1.1 ms or 2.66 ms (120 cps)

timer or 1.1 ms or 3.3 ms (SO cps) timer. Timer accuracy is

checked by running the printer diagnostic program (MOl 800).

Overspeed error -Five or six print emitters occurred during one

print head stepper motor step. Normal number

of print emitters is

2

to 4 per motor step.

Diagnostic errors generated by diagnostic sections. Refer to

Diagnostic Program Routines or MAP 300 for error definitions.

Diagnostic Program Routines 3-63

SERIAL I/O ERROR CODES

The display format for serial I/O error codes is:

ERROR xxx yyy

where xxx is the error code and yyy is the device

address

of the failing device.

Device

Error Codes

Description

Error Device Address

510

002

yyy

An invalid command was sent to an I/O device. For example:

• A REWIND (BASIC) or )REWIND (APL) command is issued to an I/O

device.

• An invalid device characteristic was specified

to the command device.

• The input buffer size was increased after the input device was opened.

• An invalid parameter was specified when opening the command device

or an I/O device.

003

yyy

In modem mode, a data terminal ready from the

I/O device is off during a

5100 transmit operation. In terminal mode, data set ready from the

I/O

device is off during a 5100 transmit operation. These conditions can be

caused by:

• The I/O device does not conform to the EIA RS232C standard

interface.

• A defective cable.

• The

I/O device power is not on.

• The

I/O device is attached with the wrong cable.

3-64

/

Device

Error

Error Codes

Device Address

Description

(

SIO 003

yyy

(continued) (continued)

(-

(

004

yyy

010

yyy

(

013

yyy

014

yyy

(/

In modem mode, request to send (RTS) from the I/O device dropped

during a 5100 receive operation. In terminal mode, clear

to send (CTS)

from the I/O device dropped during a 5100 transmit operation. These

conditions can

be caused by:

• The

I/O device does not conform to the EIA RS232C standard

interface.

• A defective cable.

• The

I/O device is attached with the wrong cable.

• The

I/O device power is not on.

• The wrong mode (modem, ignore, terminal, or set) is specified.

Hardware malfunction.

Hardware malfunction.

The 5100 recognized

an end-of-file condition. This condition can be

caused by:

·

Entering CMD

O.

·

In modem mode, data terminal ready from the I/O device is off during

a 5100 receive operation.

·

In terminal mode, data set ready from the I/O device is off during a

5100 receive operation.

The Serial

I/O Adapter feature hardware is not installed or it is defective.

The Serial

I/O Adapter program is not loaded in user storage.

An invalid device address was specified.

Diagnostic Program Routines_ 3-65

PRINT EMITTER ERROR TIMING (NOMINAL

TIMINGS)

I-

1

Print Emitter

Emitter Sequence

=

1, 3

-.fl

120 cps

SO cps

0.S3

1.25

"ffiS

"I-

2

I

I

n

n

n

n

,-----!fl

3

1

0.S3

1.25

ms

"I-

I

0.S3

1.25

ms

-I-

I

0.S3

0.S3

1.25

1.25--1

'-"'--'ms I

ms

2

3

·1-

I

I

I

~.

One missing

I

I

'-X

lOne missing

print emitter

I

I

I

i

I

I

I

I

: print emitter

=

error 056

I

I

Error 056

I

I

I

I

1

I

occurs here

!

,

:

I

71

j

I

I

Emitter sequence

=

1, 1

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I Two missing print

Two missing

1

print emitters

!/"",!

I

1

I

I

emitters

=

error 056 or 057

I

I

I

I

I

X

I

X

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Error 056 timing

------1-""

I

starts in this area

100 ms (120 cps)

150

ms (SO cps)

If error 057 timing

starts

here.-------....

an error 057 occurs

100 ms or 150 ms later -

-~­

100

ms (120 cps)

because no print emitters

150

ms (SO cps)

were present during this

time.

Three or more missing

If error 057 timing starts here,

print emitters

=

error 057

an error 056 occurs here

-----------

because an out of sequence

print emitter was sensed before

3.3 ms or 2.66 ms elapsed for

error code 057.

TAPE READ TEST ERROR CHART

(

4

-

(

-:,

,1.

,{

(

(

Error Code

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

901

903

906

907

909

912

915

918

921

924

927

930

933

936

937

938

939

940

943

Meaning

A TIN key pressed

Incorrect command detected

Machine error

Timeout

Cartridge in place errors

File protect error

Data error

Sequence error

End of data test

End of file test

End of mark test

End of tape test

Device not attached

Device not selected

Device reset error

Card logic test error

Subdevice address error

Interrupt error

Wrap test-no data

Cartridge in place error

File protect error

LED/PTX test

LED/PTX test

LED/PTX test

Erase mode test

Erase mode test-channel 0

Erase mode test-channel 1

Select magnet test

Forward select magnet status test

Reverse select magnet status test

Interrupt error

Wrap

test-no interrupt

Wrap test-extra data

Area Tested

Keyboard

F2, G2

F2, tape control card

Read/write head

Cartridge in place switch

File protect switch

Tape cartridge,

read/write head

Tape cartridge, read/write head

Tape cartridge

Tape cartridge

Tape cartridge

Tape cartridge

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2, tape control card

F2

Cartridge in place switch

File protect switch

LED/PTX assembly

LED/PTX assembly

LED/PTX assembly

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

Select magnets

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

Tape control card

Tape control card

Diagnostic Program Routines

3-67

Error Code

946

947

948

949

950

951

Meaning

Wrap test-read/write head

Wrap test-no data

Cartridge

in place error

File protect error

End of tape test

Tape motion test (forward)

Area Tested

Read/write head

Tape control card

Cartridge in place switch

File protect switch

Tape cartridge

Tape motor assembly, forward select magnet

/'

""~

"--

952

953

954

. 957

958

960

963

966

970

973

982

983

985

986

987

988

989

994

995

996

3-68

Tape motion test (reverse)

Tape motion test

BOT and EOT test

EOT test

Tape speed test

BOT test

BOT test

Tape speed test

BOT and EOT test

Tape speed test

BOT test

Read data error

Read data error-channel 1

Read data error-channel 0

Sync byte test-channel 0

Sync byte test-channel 1

Sync byte test

Read data error

Wrap

test-no error

Wrap test OK

Reverse select magnet

Brake arm

LED/PTX assembly

lED/PTX assembly

Cartridge stop blocks

LED/PTX assembly

Cartridge stop blocks

Cartridge stop blocks

F2, tape control card

Cartridge stop blocks

F2, tape control card

Tape control card

Read/write head

Read/write head

Read/write head

Read/write head

F2, tape control card

F2, tape control card

Tape control card

None

/

,

"~

/

-'"

Service Aids

ERROR INDICATORS

There are two error indicators on the 5100-the control

panel

PROCESS CHECK light and messages on the

display. The

PROCESS CHECK light is activated by

parity errors detected

in any of several functional units.

(See

Controller

in Section 4.) When the PROCESS

CHECK light is activated, the machine stops immediately

with the error latched. This allows you

to identify the

type

of error by means of the logic probe.

Error messages are displayed only when enough

of the

5100 internal functions are operating

to ensure that the

display message is accurate. Error messages appear

whenever the customer programs sense

an error

condition or when the

CE diagnostic programs are run

and

an error occurs. The errors that occur when the

diagnostic programs run are coded

to provide entry

points

to the MAPs.

Halt codes

are displayed when a failure occurs during

the bring up program. When the bring up program

is

run, a sequence of letters (A through K) is displayed;

each letter indicates the completion

of a portion of the

bring up program.

If a failure occurs during bring up,

the last letter

of the sequence indicates the failure that

occurred. This information

is used in the MAPs to

determine the cause of the failure.

Moving the switch from the RUN position stops

program processing upon completion

of the E cycles of

the current microinstruction.

To see the effect

of the run switch when the 5100 is

processing, set the DISPLAY REGISTERS switch

to the

DISPLAY REGISTERS position. Register 0

of one of the

program levels changes rapidly unless the 5100 is halted

by a halt microinstruction. Moving the run switch from

the RUN position stops register 0 and allows you to

read the hex numbers on the display. The 5100 remains

stopped until the run switch

is returned to the RUN

position or until the step switch is pressed.

(./

(

Step Switch

The step switch has no effect on the operation of the

5100 unless the run switch is moved from the

RUN

position. When the step switch is pressed, the 5100

executes one microinstruction and then stops. The step

switch must

be pressed and then released in order to

execute each microinstruction. Pressing the step switch

moves the number

in register 0 of the current program

level

to the next microinstruction address as each

microinstruction is processed.

(

JUMPERS

Machine Check Jumper

CE Switches

Two CE switches, run and step, are located inside the

5100 next

to the display assembly. Removing the top

cover allows access to these switches. The run switch

is the

two-position toggle switch and the step switch is

the small momentary switch.

This jumper connects pin G2-S07 to G2-S09 on the

5100 A 1 board. Removing this jumper allows the

controller

to continue functioning when an error occurs

on the machine check line. Misleading results can be

received by running

with the jumper removed.

Basic Language Jumper

Run

Switch

The run switch controls the operational state of the

5100. To execute programs, the run switch must be in

the

RUN position. This is the processing state and the

switch must be

in this position when the 5100 is

returned

to the customer.

This jumper connects pin F2-S04 to F2-UOB on the A1

board. The jumper ties the '+APL switch' line to ground.

Display Jumper

This jumper connects pin J2-G07 to J2-UOB. To use

the jumper,

see Note on page 2 of 551 in the

Circuits

section of this manual.

Service Aids 3-69

-_.--

..

-

-_. ---.-

DISPLAY REGISTERS

The remaining level 0 registers contain hex EEEE.

To display the hex registers and

read/write storage. size,

ROL 1

=

hex 2345 •

the DISPLAY

REGISTERS switch must be in the

RFL 1

=

hex FEDC

II

DISPLAY REGISTERS position. This displays the first

512 bytes or 256 halfwords

of storage. The first 64

halfwords are the registers.

The remaining level 1 registers contain hex DDDD.

The 64 registers (halfwords) are divided into 4 levels

(0,

ROL2

=

hex 9ABC ..

1, 2, and 3) of 16 registers each

(0

through F). The

MAPs refer

to the registers and levels in an abbreviated

The remaining level 2 registers contain hex CCCC.

manner. For example, R1 L2 means register 1 level 2.

ROL3

=

hex BCBC

II

The position of the L3Z-64-R32 switch determines the

RFL3

=

hex FFFF

II

number

of registers displayed. In the L32 position the

32 registers in levels

0

and 2 are displayed. Likewise, in

The remaining level 3 registers contain hex BBBB.

the R32 position the 32 registers

in levels

1

and 3 are

displayed. To display all 64 registers, move the switch

Register

to 64.

level Use

The following examples and the illustration show

how to

o

Normal Machine Operation

locate certain registers within the various levels. Use the

Communication/Serial

I/O

Mode

numbers

in lines 5 and 6 to help locate the registers in

2

Printer and Tape

each level.

3

Keyboard

Note: These register bytes are displayed vertically.

ROLO

=

hex 1234

II

R1 LO

=

hex 5786 •

R

FLO

=

hex

0000

II

RBL2

RAL2

7

EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

Level 2

I~~C!I:"CCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

A

CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

C

CCCCCCCC C

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB F

Line

5

Line 6

00~~~~22333F5566778899AABBCCDDEEFF

0000

00~~2233445566778899AABBCCDDEEFFOO~~2233FF5566778899AABBCCDDEEFF

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000

OOOOOOOpOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

L32

R32

3-70

Read/Write Storage Size

In this example, the read/write storage size = hex 3FFF

Altering Storage Size

To alter the storage size

to a value less than the

available storage size

of the machine:

1.

2.

Hold the CMD key down and press the HOLD key.

Hold the CMD key down and press the -(minus)

key.

Press the A key.

Enter OOAS

The address of the last byte of installed read/write

storage is stored in read/write storage halfword hex

OOAS. Read/write storage size is measured each time

the bring up program is run and is not valid at hex

OOAS

until checkpoint H is displayed.

B

(

(

The hexadecimal number

read/write storage size

indicates the amount

of read/write storage installed.

Read/write storage size

=

hex 3FFF-16K (K2, K4)

Read/write storage size

=

hex 7FFF-32K (L2, L4)

Read/write storage size = hex BFFF-48K (M2, M4)

Read/write storage size = hex FFFF-64K (N2,

N4)

All other values for read/write storage size are invalid

unless the PATCH program or serial I/O microprogram is

loaded.

3.

4.

5.

B.

Enter the storage size you desire. The size

~nt~~r~rtF.

must be smaller than the available storage size of

the machine.

Press the SPACE bar.

Hold the CMD key down and press the

*

(multiply)

key (for BASIC) or the x (multiply) key (for APL).

Enter BE.

Enter 1200 (for BASIC) or Sooo (for APL) and

press

EXECUTE.

Display the registers. The storage size you entered

will be in storage location

OOA8

6.

7.

S.

9.

10.

D.

11.

Read/Write Storage Addressing

Press RESTART to return to the original storage

size

of the machine.

008F

OOOO _____

{358EEEEEEEEE

0030

-DDDDDDDDDDDDDFD

BBBBBBBBBBBBBFF

00401~~2~4~7~6~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~E~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~D~E~C~

0080~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~B~F=F,

0100

c:

0140

0180--1-=======-=-=i1===.:..=,.;;r::.==~1=======-=-=i1=====-=-=-=

0198

OlBD

Service Aids 3-71

PRINT PLOT FORMS MOVEMENT EXERCISER

PROGRAM

The print plot forms movement exerciser program is

used

to check the 5103 Printer for' forms movement

problems. This program is contained on the print

plot/BASIC or the print plot/ APL tape cartridge. The

printout

of the program follows:

I

I

The program plots

two sets of parallel horizontal lines.

These lines are tolerance lines. The program then

,

;1

alternately plots one

dot at a time within each set of

tolerance lines. If the forms movement is working

correctly, the dots should be plotted within the tolerance

lines. After plotting all of the dots, the program then

plots the parallel vertical lines.

If the forms movement

is working correctly, these lines should be the same

length

as the distance between the top and bottom

horizontal lines; the density

of the vertical line should be

consistent.

Use the following procedure to run the print plot

exerciser program:

1. If in BASIC mode, load the print plot/BASIC

forms movement exerciser program. See

Appendix

A.

Print Plot/BASIC Forms Movement Exerciser

Program of the

IBM 5100 Print Plot/BASIC

User's

Manual,

SA21-9265. If in APL mode, load the

print

plot/ APL program. See

Appendix

A.

Print

Plot/ APL Forms Movement Exerciser Program

of

the

IBM 5100 Print Plot/APL

User's

Manual,

SA21-9264. The file name is PLOTDIAG.

Watch the results on the 5103 Printer. If the dots

are

not within the tolerance lines or the vertical

lines are not the correct length

or density, use the

Print Plot Error Chart

in this section.

3-72

/

Print Plot Error Chart

START

Use

.MAP 810

No

Yes

No

Run customer

job using this

chart

No

Yes

Run print plot test

using chart then

run

MOl 800

(

Yes

Reru n test usi ng

only amount of

paper required

Do forms emitter

disk adjustment

and emitter timing

Print emitter pick-

up, left margin, and

hold down bracket

adjustment check

for binds

Yes

Remove

tractor

assernbly and

rerun test

Notes:

Also verify:

1. Platen gear backlash

2. Forms feed stepper

motor gear backlash

Do the following adjustment:

1. Platen and paper

deflector

2. Platen release eccentrics

3. Platen pressure rolls

4. Check a frame

alignment

5. Print head adjustment

6. Print head ribbon shield

No

Verify all adjust-

ments and

use

scope procedure

on

forms emitter

Loop

MOl 800

Service

Aids 3-73

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting

Guide

This guide is a summary of the 5100 diagnostics and a

guide

for troubleshooting intermittent failures.

5100 DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY

The 5100 diagnostics start testing a small area of the

machine and gradually expand

to test the complete

system.

Each diagnostic tests a specific area and

overlap each other. For example, the

ROS diagnostic

tests

ROS but, because ROS contains the printer

microinstructions, some printer operations are indirectly

tested. Normally the tests should be run in the

sequence shown on the

Diagnostic Summary Chart.

However, in the case of intermittent failures, this

sequence can be altered depending on:

-The information you have concerning the failure.

Whether or not this

is the first call.

-How frequently the failure occurs.

There are three categories of diagnostics:

• Exercisers

• Failure isolation

• Utilities'

Exercisers

The diagnostics that fall into the exerciser category are

the bring up and

ROS resident programs. These

programs exercise the machine and halt when failures

occur.

Now you can use the MAPs to locate the failure

or,

if the failure is intermittent, use the

Diagnostic

Summary Chart

on the facing page to assist you in

isolating to the failing FRU.

Failure Isolation

The tape resident diagnostics provide failure isolation.

These diagnostics are integrated into the MAPs and are

called MDls. The

MDls locate failing FRUs associated

with the printer, the internal tape unit, the 5106 Auxiliary

Tape Unit, and Communications/Serial

I/O features.

3-74

Utilities

Utilities are contained in the ROS resident diagnostics.

They are used

to display and alter read/write storage, to

branch, to copy tape to read/write storage, and to copy

read/write storage to tape. These diagnostics are not

covered in this guide; refer

to

ROS Resident Programs

and

Tests in this section.

DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY CHART

The Diagnostic Summary Chart shows the diagnostics,

the areas tested, the operating instructions, and the

normal sequence

of use. The chart does not show all of

the diagnostic capabilities, just those primarily used for

failure isolation. When reviewing the chart, note how

the diagnostics use the

building block concept.

That is,

they begin by testing the basic machine functions and

then proceed until they have tested the most

sophisticated functions.

The bring up diagnostic does not loop automatically;

therefore, four

of its tests are repeated as ROS resident

diagnostics

CMD 2, 3, 4, and 5.

Looping on a MOl allows repetitive testing of a

complete device. Failures during looping cause a branch

to a subsection of the M DI that checks a smaller area of

the device. You can loop on subsections of the MOl to

further isolate the failure. However, it is important to

start with one of the displayed OCP2 options because

these tests are sequence sensitive.

DIAGNOSTIC SUMMARY CHART

(/

Tests

Bus Bit In

Op Code Test

R/W Storage

Interrupt 1, 2, 3

Device Address

Bus Out

Stuck

Key

Storage (0600

to end)

ROS

Content and CRC

ROS Address Read Back

Bring Up Complete

( Power On

)I-------t.~

+

-4-------1., ____ _

BRING UP DIAGNOSTICS

Halt Indicator

Blank

A

A B

A B C

A B C

D

A B C D E

A B C

D E F

A B C D E

F

G

A B C D E

F

G H

A B C D E F G H I

A B C D E

F

G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J K

Area Tested

G2, Power, Display

F2

F2, G2

E2

C2,C4,D2,D4,E2,F2

E2, F2,

J2

F2

F2, Keyboard

K2 through N4

C2,C4,D2,D4,E2

E2

H2,H4

(

OR--------------------------------------------~

DCP

1

Diagnostic Mode

I

+

Load DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode:

-

-

-

Hold CMD and press HOLD

Hold CMD and press -(minus)

Hold CMD

*

or X (multiply)

APl/BASIC

Normal machine

operation

To run CMD 0, 1,2, 3, 4, or

5:

-

-

-

Press C

Hold CMD and press the appropriate test number (0, 1,2,3,4, or

5)

Press EXECUTE

Area Tested

Tape Read

Tape Read

Op Code Loop

ROS Read CRC Loop

ROS Address Loop

R/W Storage

Internal tape unit without tape motion

Internal tape unit with tape motion

F2, G2

C2,C4,D2,D4,E2

E2

K2 through N4

Test

CMD 0 -

CMD

1 -

CMD 2 -

CMD 3 -

CMD 4 -

CMD

5 -

I

OR----------------------------------------------------------J

DCP2

+

Load DCP 1 Diagnostic Model as described above.

Run CMD 0 or 1 as described above.

Miscellaneous In

structions:

(

Press ATTN ( 1 time)

=

MDI Options

DCP 2

is now loaded. Select MD1 from the menu via the

2 times)

=

DCP 2 Menu Press ATTN (

Press ATTN (

instructions on

the display.

3 times)

=

DCP 1 Diagnostic Mode

y

I Instructions

Loop On MD

=

Refer to Loop on

I

MDI 800 -Printer -Refer to MDI 800 in this section.J

MDI in this

section

,

L

I

MOl -

,Ir

~

l

MDI -820, Communications and Serial I/O -Refer to MDI 820 in this section.

I

MDI -840, Auxiliary Tape Unit -Refer to MDI 840 in this section.J

860, Tape Write, Internal and Auxiliary -Refer to MOl 860 in this section.

I

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-75

TROUBLESHOOTING INTERMITTENT FAILURES

• Have the customer record as much information as

possible when the failure occurs.

How to Use This Guide

How often does the machine fail?

Because this is a guide instead· of a MAP, you must

Does the failure occur during one or many jobs

or

make. many decisions based on the information available

programs?

and the frequency

of the failure. The OR circles on the

Failure Isolation Chart in this section indicate

that type

Does the failure occur in BASIC, APL,

or both?

of situation.

Does the failure occur

at a particular time, such as

when the machine is first powered up or after it is

Recommendations on Failure Information

warmed up?

The following recommendations are given to assist you

Is the system configuration always the same or are

in obtaining failure information. Their order

of

other devices attached when the failure occurs?

presentation has no significance.

• Record any information on the previous items and

• Determine the customer error code

if possible. An

record any fixes in the space provided.

error code is normally more factual that the

operator's failure description. The descriptions of the

Notes

customer error codes are in

the

BASIC Reference

Manual,

SA21-9217, Appendix B and in the

APL

Reference Manual,

SA21-9212, Chapter 11. Refer to

Error Codes in this section for error codes below 100.

Use these error code descriptions

to aid you in

deciding which diagnostics

or MDls torun.

If the failure appears to be a printer or a tape

problem, record the status byte information. See

Printer Status Bytes Bit Descriptions

or Tape

Status

."

'

...

/

Byte Bit Descriptions

under

Troubleshooting

Intermittent Failures

in this section. This information

will help you

to isolate the failure and to determine

which

MOl to run.

"

,

,/

'

3-76

(

Service Hints

• Try to force the failure when running diagnostics by:

Vibrating the

machine/ cards/ connections.

Raising the machine temperature (unplug the

blower).

CAUTION

00 not exceed 20 minutes.

Lowering the machine temperature (use a circuit

coolant).

• Machine power must

be off when removing the

read/write storage cards (K2 through N2). All other

cards can be removed

with power on.

• You

can remove the following cards/devices if they

are not part

of the failing operation or when trying to

isolate to a failing operation:

A2 -

I/O Driver

B2 -Communications and serial I/O

APL cards C2, 02, 04, H4 if the failure is in

BASIC

BASIC card C4

if the failure is in APL

Read/write storage cards above 16K

5103 Printer

1506 Auxiliary Tape Unit

• You

can swap either the parts of the tape units

(internal and auxiliary) or the complete tape units

(physically or electrically). To swap electrically, swap

the cable in the Z2 socket

of the 5100 A1 board

(228) with the cable in socket B4

of the Auxiliary

Tape Unit (580). The internal tape unit address is

now E40 and the Auxiliary Tape Unit address is E80.

• To loop CMO

0:

Load and run CMO 0 until the first stop

Insert diagnostic cartridge

Hold CMO and press ATTN

Press A

Enter: 368C2B04

Press SPACE bar

Press A

Enter: 2B5831

BO

Press SPACE bar

Enter: BR2B04

Press

EXECUTE

Tape Status Byte Bit Description -Storage Address

OOSF

Bit O-End

of

Tape (EaT):

Indicates that anyone of six

holes in the tape (three at the beginning and three at the

end) generated

EOT status.

Bit

1-No

Device Address

E

Response:

Indicates that

status bit 1 was not active.

Bit

2-

Tape Running:

Indicates that the forward or

reverse select magnets were selected.

Bit 3-Cartridge in Place:

Indicates that the cartridge in

place switch is active.

Bit 4-Erase On:

Indicates that either channel 1 or

channel 0 erase current was on.

Bit 5-LED and Erase OK:

Indicates that the EOT and

BOT

LEOs were conducting and that the erase coils did

not have

an open circuit.

Bit 6-File Protected:

Indicates that the file protect

switch was made.

Bit 7-No

Beginning of

Tape

(1

=

No

BOT):

Indicates

that none of the top five holes in the tape generated

BOT status.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-77

J

:

Printer Status Bytes Bit Descriptions

Status Byte

A

(RAL2)

Bit O-Print Emitter Latch

3: Monitors the printer error

conditions and times the print wire firing.

Bit 1-Print Emitter Latch

2: Monitors the

printe~

error

condition and times the print wire firing.

Bit 2-Print Emitter Latch

1: Monitors the printer error

condition and times the print wire firing.

Bit

3 -

Wire Check or

Not

Ready:

Signals the adapter

that a print wire magnet was energized

for more than

1.6 ms when printing or 3.0 ms when not printing.

Bit 4-Forms Emitter

B: Determines when to stop.

Bit 5-Forms Emitter

A: Forms movement.

Bit

6-Not

End

of

Forms:

Indicates the presence of

forms. This signal is active when forms are within two

inches

(50.8

mm) of the print line.

Bit

7 -

Left Margin:

Used as a reference to position the

print head.

Status Byte B (RBL2)

Bit O-Print Motor Latch

B (0

=

not

B):

Provides

controls

for the print head stepper motor.

Bit 1-Print Motor Latch

A (0

=

not

A):

Provides

controls

for the print head stepper motor.

Bit 2-Print Emitter Interrupt:

Gen~rates

an 'interrupt

request 2' when print emitters are activated by the

microprogram.

3-78

Bit

3 -

Not Ready Interrupt:

Is

caUl~ed

by the printer

adapter sensing a

not ready condition from the printer.

Bit 4-Forms Motor Latch

B (0

=

not

B):

Provides

controls

for the forms feed stepper motor.

Bit 5-Forms Motor Latch

A (0

=

not

A):

Provides

controls

for the forms feed stepper motor.

Bit 6-Forms Control Interrupt:

Generates an 'interrupt

request

2' by changing conditions from the forms

control emitter.

Bit

7-

Timer Interrupt:

Indicates that the timer

interrupt controls the speed

of the print head stepper

motor.

!

Failure Isolation Chart

Start

For intermittent process

checks, refer

to

page

4-14

Review the

Customer

E"or Code Descriptions

in BASIC reference

N manual, Appendix B, and

>...;.;.-----!APL

reference

manual,

Chapter 11 to help you

determine the possibility

of an operator error.

Review the

Customer

Error Code Descriptions

in this section to help

you determine which I/O

device to test.

If

in doubt.

test all devices.

Review problem with

the operator

Run DCP "

CMD2.3.4.5

Use the

Bring Up

Diagnostic

chart in this

------------------------------------,

Start MAP 200

300

400

420

500

510

600

700

810

830

850

900

section to aid you in

card swapping

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Tape read

Bring up

Process check

Note:

MAP

organization

always

starts

with MAP 200.

Display

TV monitor

Keyboard

Po",",r

Printer

Communication,

SIO

Auxiliary tape

Machine check out

----------1

r------

'

-----,

I

MOl 890 in this section. I

I I

....

----------

.....

I

I MOl 890. Refer to :

I

~------------_4--------------~------~------~------------_4----------------~---------J

(:

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide

3-79

Language Support Troubleshooting Guide 5100 Termination Problem

Process check and/or halts might be caused by a

BASIC Diagnostic Tools

defective printer adapter card in the 5103 printer.

• List Print -Prints the user program (if a printer is

attached).

Run Trace, Print -Produces a printed trace of the

steps

as they are executed.

5100

5106.

• Pause -A pause statement inserted in a program

which allows you

to stop execution of the program in

order

to look at variables.

5103

or

Terminator

Run Step -Allows you to step through a customer

; ;'

program.

When a total system is connected, the termination is

APL Diagnostic Tools

done by the printer adapter card in the 5103 printer.

• )FNS -Lists names of user defined functions.

When only the auxiliary drive (5106) is connected, the

termination is done by the terminator assembly attached

• )VARS -Lists the variables.

to the rear of the 5106. Be sure the terminator is

mounted in the

I/O connector and not in the storage

• V

(user defined function name)

[0] -

Lists the

location.

function.

• T 6 (user defined function name) + (step numbers

CRT Centering Problem

separated by a space) -Results

in a trace of the

specified steps.

If you are not able to center the CRT after installing a

new

J2 card on an old level machine, check the tub file

T6 (user defined function name) +10 -Results in a

for subcards and FBM5572571 for the 64K machines.

trace

of the first 10 steps.

If the

B/M

5572571 is not installed, order it from

Mechanicsburg.

T6 (user defined function name) +60 -Turns trace

off.

• 56 (user defined function name) + 3 5 -Results in a

stop before statement 3 and before statement

5.

You may also do the following to help debug a

program:

• Insert statements

• Change statements

• Delete statements

• Insert print statements to print variables

• Break complex statement into several shorter

statements

./

3-80

c:

(

Bring Up Diagnostic

If the diagnostic fails often enough to use the MAPs, go to

MAP 200. Try to make the machine fail in order to answer

the MAP questions. Also review the MAP paths

to aid you

in determining which part

to swap.

If the diagnostic seldom fails, use the following chart to

help determine which part to swap.

BRING UP DIAGNOSTICS

Tests Halt Indicator

Blank

A

A B

ABC

ABC D

ABC

D E

ABC D E F

ABC D E F G

ABC D E F G H

ABC

D E F G H I

A B C D E F G H I

J

ABC D E F G H I

J

K

Area Tested

G2, Power, Display

F2

F2, G2

E2

C2,C4,D2,D4, E2,F2

E2, F2,J2

F2

F2, Keyboard

K2 through N4

C2,C4,D2,D4,E2

E2

H2,H4

f

Bus Bit In

Op Code Test

R/W Storage

Interrupt 1, 2, 3

Device Address

Bus Out

Stuck Key

Storage (0600 to end)

ROS Content

1

and CRC

ROS Address Read Back

Bring Up Complete

1

The sequence number displayed during this test identifies the card tested.

Sequence Number

10,11,12,13,14,15

16,17,18

20,21,22,23,24

25,26,27,28,29

2A,2B,2C,2D,2E,2F

ROS Card

C4 (BASIC ROS)

E2 (ROS Adapter)

D2 (APL

ROS 1)

D4 (APL ROS 2)

C2 (APL ROS 3)

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-81

Intermittent Process Check

Use the following procedure to help you find the cause

of intermittent process checks:

1. Before resetting the

PROCESS CHECK light, refer

to

Error Checking

in Section 4 of this manual. This

provides a list

of lines you may probe to help

isolate the process check error to a card or a

device.

Use the following probe points and card

references, along

with the 5100 logic diagrams

and MAPs

to isolate the process check error:

• Rd data error (-G2-S08) -This is a parity error

on data in the read data register of the

controller. Cards that can cause this error are:

the controller

(G2) card; the display (J2) card;

the BASIC,

I/O, and diagnostic (H2) cards: the

read/write storage (K2,

K4, L2, L4, M2, M4,

N2, and

N4) cards; and the APL supervisor (H4)

card. A parity error, resulting in

an Rd data

error, occurs

if there is an attempt to read from

a read/write storage address

for which the

read/write storage cards

are not installed. This

means that

if less than 64K of read/write

storage is installed,

an error in the

microprogram can cause a process check.

• Bus

in error (+G2-U09) -This error is a parity

check

on bus in. Cards that can cause this

error

are the controller (G2) card; the base I/O

(F2) card; the ROS adapter (E2) card; the

expansion feature (B2) card; and the

I/O cable

driver (A2) card.

In addition, this error can be

caused by the following

I/O devices: keyboard,

tape unit, printer, or Auxiliary Tape Unit.

To determine the device address, probe the

following address line points and refer

to the

following chart:

XO

F2-007

X1 F2-B07

X2

F2-009

X3 F2-002

YO

F2-B09

Y1 F2-01O

Y2

F2-B10

Y3

F2-011

Note: An active line will

have a + voltage level.

3-82

Device

Address

Address Lines Device Name

o

XOYO

Controller G2

XOY1

Nonexecutable

ROS

(BASIC C4 and APL

ROS C2, 02, 04)

2

XOY2 Not assigned

3

XOY3

Not assigned

4

X1YO

Keyboard and the

APL-BASIC switch

5

X1Y1

Printer

6

X1Y2

Not assigned

7

X1Y3

Not assigned

r

8

X2YO

Expansion feature

9

X2Y1

Not assigned

10

X2Y2

Not assigned

11

X2Y3

Not assigned

12 X3YO Not assigned

13

X3Y1

Not assigned

14

X3Y2

Tape units

15

X3Y3

All

I/O

• +Address check (F2-B13) -This is a device

address check on the base

I/O (F2) card. The

base

I/O (F2) card and the controller (G2) card

can cause this error.

• +Address check,

ROS adapter (E2-010) -The

device addresses are checked at the

ROS

adapter (E2) card and the error can be probed

there.

• +Address check, expansion feature (B2·J13) -

The device addresses are checked at the

expansion feature (B2) card and the error can

be probed there.

• +Address check, printer (A2-P12) -The device

addresses are checked at the printer adapter

card and the error can be probed there.

/

• +Address check, auxiliary tape (C1-P05) -The

device addresses are checked at the auxiliary

tape adapter card and the error can be probed

there.

Only one

of the device address lines XO, X1, X2,

i

or X3, and only one

of the device address lines,

YO, Y1, Y2, or Y3 will be up when a device is

addressed. The device address check, occurs

when any odd number

of the eight lines is up

when a device is addressed.

(

(

(

(

('

(~

• +Bus out parity check (F2-D13) -This is a

parity check or bus out on the base

I/O (F2)

card. Either the controller (G2) card or the base

I/O (F2) card can cause this error.

• +Bus out parity check,

ROS adapter (E2-B 11) -

The parity

of bus out is tested on the ROS

adapter (E2) card and the error can be probed

there.

• +Bus out parity check, expansion feature

(B2-M02) -The parity

of bus out is tested on

the expansion feature (B2) card and the error

can

be probed there.

• +Bus out parity check, printer (A2-P12) -The

parity of bus out is tested on the printer

adapter card and the error

can be probed there.

• +Bus out parity check, auxiliary tape (C1-P04) -

The parity of bus out is tested on the auxiliary

tape adapter card and the error can be probed

there.

2. Reseat all cards and cables.

3.

Check voltages.

4.

Check the customers AC ground.

5.

Check the fan(5).

Tape

Use the following procedure to help you find the cause

of intermittent tape errors:

1.

Any cartridges that were written before a problem

was resolved on the tape drive, can still cause

problems.

2.

Check the cartridge stops (see 224).

3.

Perform the Tape Select Magnet Service Check

(see 222).

4.

Clean the tape head with isopropyl alcohol and a

lint free tissue. Check the head adjustment (see

231). Replace the head if it

is worn.

5.

Clean the spindle assembly and the drive rolls with

isopropyl alcohol and a lint free tissue.

6.

Reset all the cables and the cards in the tape unit.

7.

Check

to be sure the tape unit does not face into

a strong light

or the sun.

8. Make sure the brake arms are white and not black.

AC Power Grounding Checks

To check for proper AC power receptacle grounding,

measure the AC voltages at the location shown

in the

following figure. This check does not detect a poor

quality ground (high resistance

to earth).

GrOUndrn°

~

~.

~

~Neutral

_

Hot

Front View

If you suspect a line problem you can:

1.

Place an isolation transformer between the line

and the 5100 computer.

2.

Inspect the AC box to be sure the wires do not

cross. The line side and load side wires should

not cross

as this can induce line spikes in the load

side wires.

3.

Check the AC box capacitors to ensure they are

not twisted and their wires

are not crossed.

4.

Check

for a machine or a device in the same

room, on the same line, or anywhere nearby

that

can induce conductive or inductive noise.

The voltage between neutral and ground should be less

than 2 volts AC.

The voltage between neutral

and hot should be

approximately 110 Vac

to 120 Vac. Also, the voltage

between ground and hot should

be approximately 110

Vac to 120 Vac.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-33

Check that all frame ground connections are clean and

tight in all devices on the system. Frame grounding is

indicated either by a braided cable or a green and yellow

wire.

5100 ground locations:

Bottom cover. center right side

CRT mounting screen and frame

Power supply fan

motor

Raceway

Power switch

AC power box

Tape unit motor

AC capacitor

in tape unit

TV monitor plug

5103 ground locations:

Left

front corner

Right

front corner

AC line cord

Flat cable shield clamp

Left rear

of forms tractor

5106 ground locations:

Tape unit motor

AC capacitor

Cooling fan

Power switch

AC line cord

A1 board

Flat cable shield clamp

AC

Power Considerations

Checking for proper AC line voltage is a task that you

are familiar with. However. other aspects

of the AC

power source are also very important. The AC line

voltage should not vary by more than

±1 0 % except for

500 ms transients of +15% to -18%.

One type of AC power disturbance becoming more

frequent is fractional phase loss. This is a result

of

phase controlled SCRs controlling motors. ovens. or

other loads. These devices turn on their loads during

each phase and deplete the sine wave

of energy.

AC

Power Terms

Current Carrying Ground:

This is

t~e

neutral line that is

connected

to the neutral bus.

3-84

Neutral Bus:

This bus bar is inside the power panel.

The other neutral buses should be tied

to this bus. The

neutral bus should be tied

to the ground bus only at the

main distribution panel.

Main Distribution Panel:

This is the first power panel

inside

of the customer's building. This panel is fed

directly from the power company lines. The ground bus

in this panel is serviced by the service entrance ground.

Ground Bus:

This bus bar is in the power panel. The

ground wire

for the power source of the 5100. along

with a wire into the panel from an approved earth

ground source. should connect to this bar.

Earth Ground:

The definition depends upon local

electrical building codes. Usually.

an earth ground is

supplied in two forms:

1.

A metal pipe running into the earth and containing

running water. Stagnant water or sump lines are

not good earth ground sources. nor are lines

broken by nonmetal connections.

2.

A metal stake driven into the ground. The length

of the stake and the depth to which it must be

driven into the ground depend on local codes.

Noncurrent Carrying Ground:

This is the line from the

ground

in the receptacle to the ground bus.

(

(

:{

AC Power Distribution in a Typical Commercial Building

Main

Distribution

Panel

I

_I

I

Transformer

Neutral

I

I

I

oav

Center _

Bus

............

~

.

.......

1"

Tap

l-

I

-~

Ground~

Bus

I

Power

Panel

A

I

I

~

These buses must be tied

to an

approved ground source.

They

These buses

Neutral

can be tied through wire

I

t

.. 3

I

must not be

Bus "'-.

but, if possible, a ground source

0

tied

together

should

o

be

supplied through wire

Ground.,

also.

~

in the power

panel.

Bus

It

-

I

I

r--........

I

I

I

I

B

Gro~nd

'.~

/' Neutral

Hot ..

~

I

U

~

U

~

UI~/--~----------------;-~

120 Vac Receptacle

Front View

To Other

120 Vac

Circuits

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-85

MOl 800 Printer Diagnostics

The following chart shows the relationsip of MOl 800

and MOls 801 through 805. MOl 800 tests the entire

printer. When MOl 800 detects a failing condition,

it

halts and displays the test routine that failed. MOl 800

isolates certain failures as shown on the chart

or

transfers to one of the other MOls shown for further

failure isolation. MOls 801 through 805 can be looped

by returning

to the MOl options and following the

instructions on the display.

801

-

(

-

End of forms

Enter

)

-

No end of forms

Forms motion problems

MOl Printer

(8001

~

Tests: 5103 circuits and mechanics.

~

802

-Incorrect status

-Voltage checks

Analyzes

to:

A 1 A 1 voltage regulator and sense amp card

803

-Adapter card,

I/O cable and signals

B 1A 2 adapter card

-Carrier motion

-

Print head motion

Left margin

-Print

head retract

Print emitter pickup

Print emitter board

804 -Print

head interface

Power

t--

'----+

-Print emitter

805

-

Left margin

-

Left margin timing

-

Print problems

-Print quality

3-86

MOl 820 Communications/Serial I/O

This

MOl tests the communications/serial I/O features which

reside on

the B2 card. When this MOl detects a failing con·

dition, it halts and displays

the routine that failed. For

descriptions

of these routines, refer to the

Communications

Adapter/Seriall/O Adapter

and Diagnostic Routines.

MOl 840 Tape Read

This diagnostic has

two parts:

1.

2.

MOl 840 tests the tape unit without tape motion ..

MOl 844 tests the tape unit with tape motion.

(

MOl 820 Communications/Serial I/O

Tests: Communications/Serial I/O circuits

The chart on this page shows the relationship

of MOl 840

through MOl 847. Be sure to record the information in the

status bytes for at least the first failure in order to compare

status information with the

MOl routine causing the halt.

Refer to

the tape status byte information in this section.

MOls 840 and 844 cannot be looped together. To loop on

MOl 840, load MOl 840 and remove the tape cartridge be·

fore running

the MOL Go to the option menu to set up

the loop. To loop on

MOl 844, load and run MOl 844. Go

to

the option menu to set up the loop.

MOl 840 and 844 can be run for both the internal or the

5106 Auxiliary Tape units. However, a confusion factor

exists since

all references are to the 5106 Auxiliary Tape

unit. Also,

the MOl subsection has to be loaded from the

internal tape unit and might

be difficult to load depending

on

the frequency of the failure.

(

Analyzes

to:

Communications:

Timer interrupts

Data set ready

Clear

to send

Data through the communications circuits

Long space interrupts

Serial I/O:

Timer interrupts

Data set ready

Clear

to send

Data through the serial I/O circuits

(

Enter

841

-Cartridge in place

-

File protect

-LED, BOT,

EOT

MOl 840 Tape Read

Tests: Tape read without tape motion

Analyzes

to:

Status reset

-

842

-Erase

-Select magnets

--.

843

-

-

Interrupt

Data th rough tape control card

(

Interrupt

Read check

845

-Catridge

in place

-Read data

-Customer error codes 002·014

MOl 844 Tape Read

(

Tests: Tape read with tape motion

846 -

BOT

-EOT

-Tape speed

847 -Tape motion

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-87

MOl 860 Tape Write Diagnostic

This

MOl tests all the tape write functions of the internal and

the 5106 Auxiliary Tape units. It also analyzes all failures

except erase

as shown in the following chart. Be sure to

record the tape status on at least the first failure. Refer

to the tape status byte information in this section.

Enter

,I'"

MDI 860 Tape Write

Tests: Tape write head and circuits

Analyzes

to:

Velocity

Acceleration

861 -Analyzes

t~.

erase

Deceleration

Write/read back

Symmetry (See Note 1 )

Peak shift (See Note

2)

Read/write head azimuth (See Note 3)

Binds in customer cartridge (See Note 4)

Notes:

The following notes are for instructional purposes

c

o c

c

o

c

only. The drawings are

not meant to be scope pictures

as the diagnostics are designed to check the tolerances.

1. Symmetry -The bit cells are of equal duration. This is

a function of the tape read/write channel. The tape

velocity tested

OK in a previous routine.

Undistorted

,

I

Raw Data

I

:

':

I

1 I I

:

I

I

I

----1-,

I

r---,

I

I----J

I I :

Clock

Clock Clock

I

tJ

,..--1.,

;

t

J

r-----'

LJ

r---

I

LJ

Peak Shifted

LJ

I I

I

1

Raw Data

I

Raw Data

--.--

3. Azimuth -The physical angular alignment of the

Bit Cell

read/write head gap with the recorded transitions on

the tape. It

is similar to skew, but due to recording

data serial

by bit and by character (as apposed to

parallel recording on 7 and 9 track tape) it is referred

'..

/

to

as azimuth.

2. Peak Shift -The timing shift of the analog signal peaks

4. Binds

in customer cartridge -All tape write tests

is due to the bit pattern and to the tape to read/write head

must run satisfactorily with

the diagnostic cartridge

relationship. This

is a function of reading tape.

prior

to inserting the customers cartridge.

3-88

MOl 890 DIAGNOSTIC SECTIONS

MOl 890 allows you

to select the same routines as used in

the other MOls. In other words, routine PT03 in MOl

890

is the same as PT03 in MOl 800. However, the

routines in MOl 890 do

not halt or branch when sensing

a failing condition. The main advantage of MOl 890 is

that it allows you to select individual MOl sections which

is especially useful when scoping intermittent failures.

(

(

Enter

l

891

-

Tap'e write routines. These are the same

routines

as MOls 840, 841,843,844,

MOl 890 Diagnostic Section

~

845,846, and 847.

Provides selection of routines for I/O

devices.

892

-

5103 J>rinter routines. These are the same

routines

as MOl 800,801,802,803,804,

and 805.

893

-

Tape read routines. These are the same

routines

as MOl 860 and 861.

~

894

-

Communications/Serial I/O routines. These

are the same routines

as those in MOl 820.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-89

5100 SYMPTOM INDEX

(

,

Symptom

Intermittent process checks with all

I/O devices attached.

Isolation Aid

Remove all the I/O devices to see if

the problem still occurs.

Fix

Replace the printer adapter card.

""

(

'",--/

Intermittent process checks and bring Check the power cable plug (YU1) on Reform the clamp holding Y1.

up failures. the A 1 board. The clamp might be

formed wrong; this allows the plug to

fall out.

Process check on power up. Suspect the K2 storage card. Swap Replace the K2 card.

the K2 card with another storage card

to verify this.

Go to DISPLAY REGISTERS. If ROLO Replace the G2 card.

,

j

Bring up failure on power up.

is 0006, the failure is in the bring up

1

diagnostic.

Fails to power up intermittently. Fans None. Replace the POWER ON/POWER

run but there is no voltage

to A 1

OFF switch.

board.

Fails

to power up within five seconds Remove the AC fan motor plug and If the machine powers up, suspect

after power down (30

to 90 seconds). the AC tape motor plug at the AC the wiring of the AC box.

box. Then power up.

Blows card and land patterns on A 1 Check the TV monitor line cord wiring The customer must have the TV

board after installing a

TV monitor. for an error causing chassis to be hot monitor wiring corrected.

(110 AC).

Keyboard locks with flashing cursor. Check the last key pressed and verify

Clean or replace the failing flyplate

that it operates. Press the RESTART and / or key module.

key

to isolate the failing key.

Key is pressed and wrong character is

None.

Replace the ROS card, storage card,

displayed. or display card.

Unsteady display. Switch

to DISPLAY REGISTERS. Repair the connections on the

Check the connections on the

brightness control.

brightness control.

No display and registers are

not Remove the printer from the system. Replace the printer adapter card.

running.

Unable to clear messages from

None (operator error). Do not use undefined function keys or

display line 15 when errors occur

copy display

without a printer

during an input statement. attached to the system.

Display character distortion. Adjusting the CRT has little or no Replace the J2 card.

effect.

TV monitor has wavy or distorted 5100 display is OK. Uncrimp the cable connection

to the

characters.

TV monitor.

166 APL halts in BASIC. The problem shows up in new

Do not use new unmarked tapes

as

unmarked tapes copied by the tape

output

for the tape copy program.

copy program.

Mark the new tapes

with at least one

file before using.

3-90

,--/,

/

/

"

Symptom

003 through 010 intermittent errors.

003 and 004 errors when marking

new tapes.

003, 004, and 007 errors.

(

003, 004, 007 and 008 errors.

004 and 007 errors on diagnostics

and customer jobs.

004 and 007 errors.

004,005, 006, 007, and 008 errors.

004, 007, and 008 errors.

007 errors.

Isolation Aid

Fix

Check the customer grounding and Check to see if customer is using an

the 5100 grounding.

ungrounded extension cord.

None.

Replace the LED/PTX assembly.

Check

for bad solder connections at

Replace

or repair the cables and verify

paddle cards and cable connectors.

that all connections are good.

Also check

for strands of wire

shorting

to pins.

None.

Replace the H2 card.

Moving the cable that goes to the Replace the CRT.

CRT away from the tape control card

causes the problem

to disappear.

Loose read/write head. Replace the read/write head.

The customer usually sees only 005 Adjust tape microswitches for a

errors, but

can create 007 errors

clearance

of 0.001 inches (0.025 mm)

unknowingly.

to 0.003 inches (0.076). Adjust for

maximum overtravel.

Locking wheels are not centered or

Adjust the locking wheels (see 225)

seated properly in the base.

and check the adjustment by pulling

the cartridge out about

1/8 inch (3

mm) and releasing it. The cartridge

should seat

in the tape unit.

Excessive retries.

Check the select magnet and the

jackshaft adjustments.

(See 222 and

223.)

The motor locks up or does not move Replace the motor.

the tape properly.

The tape rubs against the cartridge

Reposition the tape on the spools by

base plate or plastic top.

doing a )LlB

or UTIL; then mark a file

to the end of tape and do a rewind.

Extra bytes are written

in the data

Check out the tape by doing a )LlB or

record filed on the diagnostic tape

UTIL on the diagnostic tape cartridge.

cartridge during a CMD 0 or CMD

1. If this works, load the failing file

using the CMD 8 function.

If there is an error in the data, an 007

error will be displayed. You

can

rebuild the damaged file using a

known good tape and CMD 8 and

CMD 9 procedures.

The display is not blanked during tape

IN PROCESS and PROCESS CHECK

operations. leads are swapped.

(See 210 for

correct wiring).

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-91

Symptom

007 and 008 errors.

Isolation Aid

Fix

The spindle is glazed from improper Clean the spindle and drive rolls using

contact pressure

between the spindle isopropyl alcohol.

and· the tape cartridge. This causes

retries and tape errors.

The customer cannot copy a complete

tape

to another tape or complains

that tapes have different storage

capacity.

Spindle or jacks haft bearings.

Check

for proper wiring of the I/O

device.

All tapes have 204K bytes storage

capacity.

New files requireO.5K bytes

for each file header. This must be

considered when you set up

the files.

Replace as required.

Wire the I/O device to provide' data

terminal ready'

if the 5100 is acting

as a modem. If the device is acting

as a terminal, wire the I/O device to

provide 'data set ready'.

Check the brake arms

to ensure they

are white.

010 and 012 errors.

Noisy tape drives.

SIO fails to run the I/O device.

004 error. Tape does not move. Fails when

started after being inactive

for some

time.

012 error.

007. error

with printer attached.

007 error.

Check

to see if the tape unit is facing Prevent direct sunlight from entering

a window. the tape drive opening.

Disconnect the 5103 printer to

eliminate the error.

Find out if the tape cartridge was in!

the tape drive when the power was

turned on or off.

Replace the G2 card.

Do not power the 5100 on

or off with

the tape cartridge in the drive.

Check jumper J2G07

to ground.

In BASIC, rows

of 1's, 3's, 5's, or 9's None.

appear. In APL,

CRT is blank.

Tape binds when being inserted or

does not seat properly.

004, 007 tape· errors.

Pr()cessor checks or printer errors

with the 5106 attached.

Processor check on 860.

Diagnostic tape is damaged

or 007

error occurs when diagnostic tape is

run.

Do the stop adjustments and ensure

The

window on the tape cartridge

should have some clearance between

the outer edge

of the stop is parallel

the deflector and the right stop.

to the edge of the tape unit upright.

Find out

if the operator is continuing

to key when the tape is running.

Do not key while the tape is running.

See

if BVD fails E-5. Disconnect the

Repair the defective

I/O connector in

5103 and 5106.

the 5106.

Swap storage cards

to stop error on Replace G2 card.

Do not put the diagnostic tape

cartridge

in the tape drive when

performing

CMDO or CMD1 or the

tape will be destroyed.

Check jumpers from A 1 J2G07

to

A1J2P08 and from A1G2S07 to

A1G2S09.

/

806.

None.

Processor checks occur on power up, Check jumpers on the A 1 board.

but· restart works OK.

,

3-92

c

(

(

(

Symptom

Isolation Aid

Fix

Intermittent tape errors 004, 007, and None.

Adjust the select magnets

for correct

OOS.

air gap.

A 152 error did not occur when

Check to see

if failure occurs only on Alter storage size to 6 bytes less than

loading a file larger than

64K bytes. 64K machines. 64K when trying to load a file larger

than 64K.

Intermittent processor checks

from

Usually fails when keying fast.

Replace

F2 card.

the keyboard.

Blank CRT. None.

Check

that the CRT connector is

plugged in properly. The end

of the

cable

that has 5 wires must be

toward the

front of the 5100.

Intermittent processor checks.

Meter the process check

for a '+RDR' Replace the CRT.

error.

Intermittent processor checks on halt

Unplug the fan (for no more than 15

Replace

E2 card.

11S with bring up diagnostics.

minutes)

to cause a solid failure.

003 and 004 tape errors.

Check the status byte in location

Correct defective

read/write head.

OOSF. The byte will be 35 for normal

and

39 with this error.

On

the 5100 model C, the character Failure still occurs when you enter

Replace C2 card.

entered does not match the character characters

with about 15 to 20

keyed. seconds' delay between strokes.

Dropping power.

Plug the power supply into another

Replace POWER

ON/OFF switch.

5100

to be sure it works.

Noisy tape drives.

Fails usually in one direction.

Replace jackshaft.

Keyboard locks up intermittently.

None.

Replace CRT.

Power up fails intermittently.

Switch J 1 and

J2 plugs.

Replace the POWER

ON/OFF switch.

Processor checks on power up.

None.

Check

Y1 cable plugging.

Fading

CRT.

None.

Replace G2 card.

No power to A 1 board.

Check the AC voltage on the output

Replace the AC line filter.

of the line filter.

Print plot stops intermittently.

None.

Replace G2 card.

004 and 007 errors.

None.

Replace internal

or external cable.

Tape errors. None. Replace

CRT.

Characters on the CRT are different

Characters at the

top left corner of Replace F2 and J2 cards.

sizes.

the CRT are larger than those at the

bottom right corner.

Intermittent '+RDR' processor checks. The error becomes solid when you Replace

F2 card.

unplug the fan

for 15 minutes or less.

CRT display jitters. Check the connectors on the

Replace

J2 card or the CRT.

brightness control potentiometer.

Character entered does

not match the None.

Replace defective display, storage,

or

character on the CRT.

ROS card.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-93

5100 SERVICE TIPS

• You can either swap the parts

of the internal and

auxiliary tape units, or you can physically

or

DANGER

electrically swap the complete tape units. To swap

Do not touch or attempt to remove the coax cable

electrically, swap the cable in the Z2 socket

of the

while the TV monitor is plugged into

an AC outlet.

5100

A1 board with the cable socket in socket B4 of

There is the possibility

of 110 volts being carried on

the Auxiliary Tape Unit. The internal tape unit

the coax BNC connector and the cable shield,

if the

address is

now

E40

(BASIC) or 002 (APL).

TV monitor has not been properly modified by the

user. This voltage could also appear on the frame

of

the 5100.

Tape File Recovery

This procedure can be used

to recover tape files before

and after a defective file (CRCin header). To identify a

defective file, do a UTIL or )UB

of the cartridge starting

with file 1.

General

Tips

Use the following example: Files 1 through 4 are good,

• Try to force the failure when running diagnostics by:

file 5

is defective (CRC in header), files 6 through 10 are

Vibrating the machine/cards/connections.

good. By using the normal load and save commands,

Raising the machine temperature (unplug the

you

can save files 1 through 4. When file 5 is reached

blower).

(defective file). remove the cartridge and manually move

the tape forward past a load

of the file 6, and repeat

CAUTION

the load and save operations

for fields 6 through 10.

Do not exceed 20 minutes.

(Be sure to save to a different tape and mark as

required.) By marking file 4 on the defective tape one K

larger than

it was, you can reuse the tape. All files past

file 3 are

now lost.

Lowering the machine temperature (use a circuit

coolant).

• Machine power switch must be down (off) when you

remove the

read/write storage cards (K2, K4, L2, L4,

M2, M4, N2, N4). All other cards can be removed

with power switch up (on).

• You can remove the following cards/devices

if they

are

not part of the failing operation or when you are

trying

to isolate to a failing operation:

A2-1

/0 cable driver card

B2-Communications card

C2-Asynchronous communication/serial

I/O card

APL cards

(C2, 02, 04, H4) if the failure is in

BASIC

-BASICcard

C4 if the failure is in APL

Read/write storage cards (K2, K4, L2, L4, M2,

M4, N2, N4)

5103 Printer

5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit

3-94

r

',,-

j

(

(

(

(

(

Tape Mark

This procedure allows you to remark (initialize) a tape if

file 1 is defective (CRC in header). Be sure to recover all

files after file 1 before using this procedure. Recover all

data possible before doing this. Use the file recovery

procedure first.

1.

Rewind the tape and do a UTIL or )LlB

to ensure

file 1 is defective.

2.

Rewind the tape to the loed point (single hole in

tape).

3.

Remove the tape and wind the load point hole

onto the right reel.

4.

Jumper U10 to U08 on the back of the tape unit

(control card pin side) (227).

5. Insert the tape and with a thin screw driver reach

in from the right side

of the tape unit and push

the jackshaft to the left. This causes the tape

to

move forward. Move the tape forward about six

inches.

S.

Release the jackshaft.

7.

Remove the jumper.

8.

Rewind the tape.

9.

Mark the tape starting in file 1.

Freelanee Aids

Isolation aids that can be used when freelancing:

1. Disconnect one or both external I/O devices.

CAUTION

The last cabled I/O device must have a terminator

or you will get proceS$ checks and bring-up

diagnostic errors. The 5103 has its own internal

terminator.

2. Remove all but 16K bytes of storage and

uSe

extra

cards

to isolate the problem.

3. Remove the A2 card to isolate the 5100 from the

external

I/O.

4. Remove the B2 card to isolate the 5100 from the

communications

and/or SID.

5. Disconnect the CRT connector if a display is not

needed.

6. All 5100 cards except read/write storage can be

pulled

with power on.

7. All pins except voltage pins can be tied down.

8. Check all voltages.

9. Disconnect the fan motor to heat the machine and

aggravate the failure.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 20 minutes of machine operation

without fan running and

COVl;lrs installed.

Intermittent FaillJres Troubleshooting Guide 3-95

Card and Board Jumpers

Failures on the 5100 which are hard

to analyze might be

associated with the jumper installed on the A 1 board,

the G2 card, or the

J2 card. In several cases, the

jumpers have been missing or loose.

When working with the A 1 board or its cards, be sure

that the jumpers are installed correctly.

If you are

experiencing any

of the following symptoms, check the

jumpers: (See 209 for the correct jumpering of the logic

cards.)

1. Process check on power up, but restart works

properly.

2. No display; will not restart; meaningless data on

the display.

3.

Single row of digits across the bottom of the

display,

or blank display.

4.

Unable to analyze process checks; or, more than

one type

of process check at the same time.

5.

Wrong characters printed on the printer or

displayed on the display.

3-96

Read/Write Head (007) Errors

The following

read/write head adjustment procedure

might decrease 007 tape errors:

1.

Remove the tape control card.

2.

Loosen the

read/write head.

3.

Position the

read/write head against the front and

left

of the mounting recess and tighten the

mounting screw (facing the

front of the machine).

4.

Make sure the read/write head grounding wire

clears the cartridge door when the cartridge

is

inserted.

5.

Clean the

read/write head with isopropyl alcohol

part 220020C and lint free tissue.

6.

Replace the tape control card and test the 5100

using the tape read test and MOl 860.

Intermittent Process Checks

If you are experiencing intermittent process checks on

the 5100 and cannot determine the type

or the cause,

see

Error Checking

in the

Theory

section. When an error

occurs, do not reset the machine. This will allow you

to

probe the failing line.

Dropping Records

If you are experiencing dropping records from files, or if

you are getting 009 or 152 errors, check the file to see

which recent changes were made and if the file is larger

than the available workspace. If you load a data file into

storage, get a 152 error, make changes or corrections

to

that file, and then save the file, all data beyond the

available storage will

be lost. To eliminate losing these

files, change or update the files under program control.

,/

(

(

(

Attachment of a TV Monitor A modified TV set must have isolation between the

primary line voltage and the frame and circuitry

of the

A standard TV set may be modified and used as a video

set. This can be accomplished by using

an isolation

monitor

for the 5100.

transformer between your outlet line voltage and the

voltage input

to the TV set. This transformer should be

Generally, modifying a standard TV set and using

it as a

permanently wired into the circuit. The new input power

video monitor yields less satisfactory results than using

plug must be a three-prong grounded plug with the

a regular video monitor. This is because the same level

ground connected

to the chassis of the TV set. This

of quality is not built into TV receivers as is found in

grounding circuit must be electrically connected

to the

monitor class units. For example, the contrast and

5100 grounding circuit.

resolution are not

as good on a modified TV receiver;

thus the image is

not as sharp and is usually more

Before the video input is connected

to anything, it

difficult

to read.

should be tested to verify that the connector's external

shell is at ground potential and that no line voltage is

However,

if a TV receiver is modified and used as a

present on either the external shell or the center

video monitor, the following procedure must be

conductor.

observed, or exposure

to a severe electric shock or

damage

to the 5100 may occur when the TV set is

It is the responsibility of the TV modifier to ensure that

connected

to the IBM 5100.

the input circuit meets the requirements

of the 5100

output and will not damage the 5100. IBM will not

modify the TV receiver.

Three-Prong

Isolation

TV

Grounded

Plug

Output

Transformer

Note:

If a TV receiver is modified for use as a video

monitor, IBM accepts no responsibility

for safety

precautions during conversion and hookup,

for damages

incurred

to the TV receiver or 5100, or for the quality of

the TV receiver as a video monitor.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-97

Monitor Video Out Service Check

Set up the scope as follows:

Use an x10probe

Connect channel 1 to A 1 K2B04

(+

monitor video)

Set these switches:

Sync -internal

Sweep -auto trigger

CHl volts/div -0.1 volts

Time/Div -10 p.s

Slope -(-) minus

Coupling -

D.C.

Note:

Be sure to ground the scope probe.

With the 5100 power switch set to ON and the

DISPLAY REGISTERS switch set

to DISPLAY

REGISTERS, you should

see the following pattern on

the scope:

B

A

1---.------'"

641-1

s

-----..,.1

Ground -------------------------------------------------------------------

A

=

1.0 volts minimum to ground

B

=

=

1.4 volts minimum to ground

C

2.25 volts minimum to ground

D

=

63.3

p. seconds for one sweep of

+

monitor video

The TV monitor, when connected, should provide a

75....1""..

termination load to the 5100 source ground. If

several monitors are to be used, they should be daisy

chained and the last monitor in the string terminated

with 75-,,-. In some cases the 5100 may overdrive the

TV

monitor. It may, therefore, be necessary for the

customer

to add a 75-"'-.attenuator to the back of the

5100.

3-98

"--

,/

PRINTER SYMPTOM INDEX

Symptom Isolation Aid

Fix

Resolder the connections or replace

the cable.

Process checks with the 5103 Printer Check the solder connections on the

or the 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit

I/O interface connectors.

attached

to the 5100.

(

Wavy print or 057 errors (vertical print The print head

might be touching the

Check

that the emitter board and

alignment). foam on the inside

of the cover.

pickup are adjusted properly. Remove

a small portion

of the foam if

necessary. If the print head is moved

manually, the characters will not line

up with the characters printed before

the interruption.

051,054, and 058 errors. Check the forms guide rack for proper Ground the forms guide rack. Be sure

grounding. the screw fastening the ground strap

to the forms guide is making good

contact.

None.

Check the bottom

of the printer for

two orange shipping bolts.

Check the screws on capacitors C 1

and

C2 to make sure they are tight.

Capacitors C1, C2, and C4 measure

OK with no power applied.

Carrier drive belt dirty.

Check

for missing +24 V and

+10.5 V.

Check

for print wires protruding

through the print head.

Errors occur when running MDI 800.

Replace the print emitter pickup card.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

Remove the orange shipping bolts

using the 5103 unpacking instructions.

Tighten all screws on these

capacitors.

Replace the C1 card. C1 breaks down

under power.

Clean or replace the belt.

(See the

5103

MIM.)

Replace transistor Q1 in the 51.03

Printer power supply. (See the 5103

MIM.)

Replace the ribbon.

Replace the print emitter pickup card.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

056 and 057 errors when running

MD1800.

Forms gear binds on the

top cover.

050

to 059 errors.

~

,1

051 errors when attempting to print.

056 and 057 errors.

Tighten the eccentric and/or print

Check print head and carrier

head.

assembly. Make sure the carrier is

mounted solidly

to the guide bars.

Also check the eccentric

to be sure it

is positioned properly.

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-99

Symptom

Intermittent 051 through 059 errors

and other intermittent problems.

Isolation Aid Fix

..

Check all grounds on the 5103 Printer Check the AC power source for

and on the 5100. proper grQUnEling.

Check that the forms tractor unit is

mounted securely on the printer.

Check the frame ground

to forms

guide.

Check the ground strap connections.

Check the

I/O interface cable

grounds.

Check

for noise being generated by

other equipment on the AC power

line.

r'

Wavy printing. occurs, or left margin

varies by one position.

None.

Place printer on a solid surface.

Reposition the paper deflector on the

left side.

Replace the print emitter pickup. (See

the

5103

MIM.1

Tighten the power supply mounting

screws.

Fails

to print in the first few positions None.

in each line.

All print wires fire at the left margin

or the motor hangs up at the left

margin.

End of forms and forms motion

problems.

Check the emitter pickup for

excessive solder that might be

shorting out the print emitter board.

Check the screws

inthe 5100 power

supply. Loose mounting screws can

cause noise

to be generated

throughout the system.

Forms feed fails

to index.

Check

for binds and other mechanical Repair binds in the platen gears, idler

problems. gears, forms

motor/emitter assembly,

or forms tractor unit.

See the

5103

MIM for adjustments

and replacement.

Replace the broken idler gear stud on

the forms

motor/emitter assembly.

Adjust

or replace the forms emitter

assembly.

Replace the forms feed emitter

amplifier.

I

Adjust or replace the end of forms

switch.

Replace the motor driver card (A

1

B

1

I

.

Forms run backward.

Fails

to print.

None.

Do a copy display.

Adjust the forms emitter. (See the

5103

MIM.1

Replace the printer adapter card.

:3-100 : .

Symptom Isolation Aid

None.

Fix

Adjust or replace the end of forms

switch. (See the 5103

MIM.)

Adjust or replace the print emitter

pickup. (See the 5103 MIM.)

Adjust the copy control dial.

(

(

Fails to print or head fails to move.

Adjust the print head

to platen

clearance.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

Check for shorts between the print

emitter and print emitter pickup.

Print plot fails to print.

Extra line spaces.

Printer diagnostics should run

OK.

Replace the G2 card in the 5100.

(

Check for excessive play in gear train.

Adjust or repair excessive gear play.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

This causes incorrect partial lines.

Adjust or replace the forms emitter.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

Variable line sl*lcing (forms creep).

Excessive play in the gears.

The forms emitter is not adjusted

properly.

Adjust the gear wink.

Adjust the forms emitter. (See 5103

MIM.)

The forms tractor unit is not mounted

securely.

((

Print line skewed or crooked.

The forms tractor unit must be

parallel

with the platen and seated at

all four mounted points.

Remove the right side cover and

loosen the

two shaft screws 1 / 8 to

1 /4 turn to allow the forms tractor to

seat properly.

Check

for cover interference.

Uneven left margin.

None.

Adjust the left margin. (See the 5103

MIM.)

Check the adjustments of the print

emitter and the print emitter pickup.

(See the 5103

MIM.)

1:(

Missing part of the character in print

position 1.

None.

Adjust the left margin.

(See the 5103

MIM.)

Check the adjustments of the print

emitter and the print emitter pickup.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

Overpri

nti ng.

Overprinting occurs

if a print emitter

error is detected while a line is being

printed.

If the data is correct. check

for a defective or misadjusted print

emitter

or print emitter pickup.

Adjust

or replace the print emitter or

the print emitter pickup. (See the

5103

MIM.)

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-101

Symptom

Backward printing

'(mir~or

image).

Isolation Aid

Check the parallelism between the

print emitter and the print emitter

pickup. Use the

two small land

patterns on the

top right side of the

printer

to aid you in making this

check. The distance between the land

patterns and the print emitter pickup

should

not vary more than 0.025

inches (0.64 mm).

Fix

Reform the right side frame near the

support shaft. Adjust the gap

between the print emitter and the

print emitter pickup. (See the 5103

MIM.) Also check that the print

emitter moves freely

as the horizontal

fine adjustment knob is turned

to

both extremes.

Check the ground locations.

/

I

I

Adjust

or replace the end of the

forms switch.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

I

Replace the print head cable. (See

the 5103 MIM.)

Adjust

or replace the print emitter or

the print emitter pickup. (See the

5103 MIM.)

Light printing.

Adjust the copy control dial.

Replace the ribbon. Adjust the

clearance between the print head and

the platen.

(See the 5103 MIM.)

One end

of a print line is darker.

Check the A-frame alignment. (See

the 5103 MIM.)

The ribbon is not advancing. Check

for broken ribbon drive lines,

defective drive clutches, and incorrect

alignment

of the ribbon drive gears.

Also check that the ribbon feed roll

release knob is in the proper position.

Not enough tension on the two print

Check

for 700 to 900 grams of

head springs.

tension at the tip of the print head

near the print wires. This

measurement should be taken while

the platen is removed and with the

print head located near the center

of

the machine.

Check for mechanical. binds, sticking,

or other interference that would

prevent the print head from making

complete contact

with the platen.

Especially check the print head cable.

Every other line has light printing.

None.

Check

for broken ribbon drive lines.

Check

for a defective ribbon drive

clutch.

3~102

I'

Symptom

Broken print wires.

Isolation Aid

To prevent breaking print wires:

Set the copy control dial

to the proper

forms thickness.

Instruct operators never

to print over

perforations, feed holes or the edge

of the forms.

Ensure that all fixes

for ribbon jams

are installed.

Fix

(

Printer blows fuses.

(

Disconnect

EC3 at the print head to Check for more than one active wire

drive signal from the system.

keep from blowing fuses; then

measure the wire driver inputs at

cable A1A3 with your meter. All

Check for a defective signal cable.

inputs should be at

an up level of

+4.5 to +5.5 Vdc or +1.4 to +20 Vdc.

A

down level indicates an active level.

None.

Replace A1A1 card and the

Q1

transistor.

+24 Vdc supply voltage is too high.

Printing stops.

Capacitor C4 is the filter capacitor for The problem can be caused by any of

the +5 Vdc to the printer. the following:

• Open capacitor

C4.

• Loose, broken, or poorly crimped

wire between C4 and point 1 A.

• Open circuit between point 1 A and

test point V4.

• Loose, broken,

or poorly crimped

wire between point 4F and

capacitor

C4.

• Open land pattern between point

4F and test point

GS.

(

Replace the A 1 A 1 card.

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-103

Symptom Isolation Aid Fix

/

Adjust, repair, or replace the end'

of

Printing stops intermittently or printer Disable the end of the forms switch

by jumpering

A1-A3D13 to

prints backward when running

forms switch, the wiring, or the

diagnostics or programs.

mechanism.

(See the 5103 MIM.) Al-A3C08. Ifthe symptom

disappears, the problem is in the end

of the forms switch, the mechanism,

or the wiring.

Printing stops.

Check the print emitter or print

emitter pickup boards

for warpage or

contaminants. Adjust, repair, or

replace as required. (See the 5103

MIM.)

Component failures are not always

Replace the forms feed photocell

detected by the static checks. They

assembly

or forms feed emitter

can, however, cause the printer

to fail

amplifier. (See the 5103 MIM.1

under dynamic (operating) conditions.

An oscilloscope normally is required

to detect these problems.

Print head carrier stops near right

side.

Check that the belt clamp does not

touch the print head stepper motor

when the print head carrier is moved

to the extreme right.

None.

Adjust the belt clamp

as required.

""

,

/

051 error. Replace print head cable.

Breaking print wires, jamming ribbon,

Check for the correct part number on If the H2 card is part 1607112 and

and jamming paper.

the printer adapter card and the H2 the printer adapter card is part

card. 1607124, the adapter card is

for a

120 characters per second printer.

Replace the printer adapter card

with

part 1607130, which is for a 60

characters per second printer.

Solid 050 error.

Probe the P13 pin on the printer

adapter card

to ensure 'EOF line is

up.

ON/OFF switch checks OK.

Repair defective A 1 power board.

'

"

..

,/

Intermittent 057 errors while printing.

051 errors.

Print emitter board course adjustment Tighten print emitter board course

screws are loose. adjustment screws.

Check

for +8.5 volts in the 5103. If the +8.5 volt power is missing,

repair the connection on the A 1

power connector

in the 5100.

Replace the missing pin that holds the

print head pulley

to the stepper

motor.

When error codes are checked and

052 errors occur, replace defective

forms emitter stepper motor.

057 and 059 errors.

None.

Forms movement problem

with no

error codes.

Customer uses APL, and program is

not checking

for error codes.

3·104

(

(

Symptom Isolation Aid

Fix

Not printing some dots (on print plot All diagnostics run OK.

Replace print head.

only).

Forms feeding fails

to stop on 050 None.

Repair bouncing

EOF switch or adjust

error.

EOF switch.

Missing dots, or extra dots printed. The 5103 may add or drop a

Replace F2 card in the 5100.

complete vertical line

for a character

and have no error halts.

Solid 052 errors. Copy display fails. Replace F2 card in the Sioo.

Print misalignment vertically. When running MOl 800, the second

Check

for binds or replace the ribbon

or third line

of Hs are misaligned

drive roll assembly.

vertically.

051 errors. Check for voltages dropping when the Replace C2, C3, or C4 capacitors.

error occurs.

Intermittent or solid 052 errors. Probe the signal on the printer

Replace the A2 card or cable in the

adapter card pin C5J 13.

It should be

5100.

pulsing.

Failure to print or 057 errors occur Check for +5 volts at TP-V5. Replace shorted emitter board.

when trying

to power up a 5100 APL

machine with the 5103 printer turned

on.

Left margin varies.

Printer recently changed from

an 80 Ensure that the H2 card is part

characters per second to a 120

1607126.

characters per second machine.

Intermittent 056 errors.

Fails when printing right

to left past

Repair print head cable.

position 100.

057 errors or wavy print.

Print head does

not move smoothly.

Replace print emitter board.

052 errors.

Check 'forms emitter A' line at pin

Replace forms emitter stepper

motor

V07 and

'forms emitter B' line at pin assembly.

S12. Both lines should be pulsing

when the printer is spacing paper.

Carrier belt

not tracking correctly.

Belt is improperly adjusted.

Move print head

to the right margin

and adjust the carrier belt.

Paper jams.

Not a new style printer with the

Check

for bent pins on the tractor

ON/OFF switch on the front. assembly. Check to see the ECA 11

(EC 812672) is installed.

Print plot has misaligned dots.

None.

Use paper with a thickness of 0.0030

to 0.0075 inches (0.075 to 0.188

mm).

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-105

PRINTEft SERVICE TIPS

Reset Signal Line Checkout

A 'reset' signal line that is not functioning pl'OJ)erly

will

not always cause printer failures. Consequently, there is

no particular symptom associated with this problem. If

you suspect that the 'rl!!sef signal line is not functioning

properly.

use the fbllowing J)rocedure to check out the

'reset' signal

in the printer:

1.

Power down the

5100.

2.

Do not power down the printer.

3.

Probe B1-84, 812 (-Reset).

4. Power up the

5100.

5.

Check that the probe DOWN light is ori.

6.

Press the HOLD key. Press the CMD key and the

+

key to copy the display.

7. Check that the probe UP light is on.

B. Power down the printer.

9.

Check that the probe DOWN light is on.

~rint

Emitter

Timing Using

MOl

805

If you are doing left margin adjustments, run MOl 805.

This MOl checks the timing

of the left margin. You can

also loop on step to theck for intermittent errors. If you

do the print emitter pickup adjustment 340, do the left

margin adjustment 343 and run MOl 800

to verify the

adjustments.

3-106

Forms Emitter Timing Scope Procedure

1. Remove the forms tractor unit and the paper.

2.

Move the copy control dial to eliminate printing on

the . platen.

3.

Load printer diagnostic MOl

BOO.

Loop on the

step number that indicates quick forms movement

test

(PT01V5).

/

4.

Place the scope lead On U07 on the printer

adapter card (forms emitter A). Display one pulse

on the screen.

Good: Adjust until display looks like this:

Bad:

__ -..o!J

Bad:

u

n

1

1..

--~"----

Forms Jams

The following items can cause forms jams and incorrect

forms movement:

There

is incorrect pressure plate clearance on the

forms tractor.

The paper deflector

is too close to the platen.

The cut form guide

on the left rear top cover is

not flipped back

or it is used with continuous

forms.

The paper path is incorrect.

See the BASIC or

APL reference manuals for correct forms feed

paths.

.

... ./

Forms

are being used that are thicker than

specified. The maximum forms thickness allowed

is 0.018 inch (4.572 mm). See the

Form Design

Reference

Guide,

GA24-348B.

The ribbon shield might be too close to the platen.

The forms tractor unit

is not parallel with the

platen and is not fully seated at

all four mounting

points.

All the pressure rolls do not contact the platen

evenly.

Ribbon Jams

Check the following items if you are experiencing

frequent ribbon jams:

The ribbon shield is not adjusted properly.

There is improper tracking

of the ribbon through

the ribbon feed rolls. The ribbon should

not be

above the rollers more than 0.010

to 0.015 inch

(0.254

to 0.381 mm). If the ribbon is above the

rollers, one of the following could be the cause:

• The rollers are

not adjusted properly. Check

that the rollers are the same height and are not

cocked.

f

• The print head cover is hitting the print cable

near the oil reservoir. This can cause the left

side

of the head cover to rise and lift the ribbon

off the print head. If this condition is present,

cut a small portion from the head cover where

it hits the head cable.

• The ribbon box may

be positioned too low.

Loosen the

two screws holding the ribbon box

to the carrier (one on the left side and one in

the bottom of the box), and raise or lower the

box

for proper ribbon tracking through the

ribbon rollers. Retighten the screws.

(

-The ribbon drive rolls are sticking. Remove and

clean the rollers.

There are metal spacers

in the ribbon roller

assembly between the rubber rolls and the plastic

housing. Replace the rollers

if either spacer is

missing (one at the top of the rollers and one at

the bottom).

-The print wires are protruding beyond the face

of

the print head by more than 0.002 inch (0.0508

mm).

The copy control dial

is improperly set. The dial

should be set for good print quality on the last

(/

copy and no smudging on the first copy. The

numbers on the copy control dial do not

correspond

to the number of parts in the form.

(~:

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-107

5103 FORMS FEED STEPPER MOTOR/EMITTER

5. Connect the probe power lead (red) to test point

TIMING

V5 and the black lead

to G6.

6. Place the Printer Adapter card in the service

Adjustment

position on machines with

EC 579623 or EC

579920. Refer to the 5103 MIM (312).

Two techniques are available for the adjustment of the

emitter timing: the general logic probe method and a

7. Probe A2-U07 on the B1 board with the probe

program that must be entered manually. The logic probe

ground lead on

P08. On

machine~

without EC

method provides sufficient accuracy

for normal printer

579623 or EC 579920, probe TPA on the forms

applications, but,

print/ plot applications that require

feed emitter amplifier

card. with the probe

reverse forms motion may need

to use the programming

ground lead on test point G8.

technique.

8. Power up.

General Logic Probe (GLP) Adjustment Method

9.

Slide the photocell down as far as possible.

1.

Power down.

10. Slowly slide the assembly up until the probe UP

light comes on.

2.

Remove the printer cover. Refer to the 5103

MIM

(310).

Note:

If the UP light is on with the photocell down

as far as possible, slide the assembly up until the

3.

Connect a jumper wire between test points FMA

UP light goes out and then comes back on.

and

G7 • (forms motor driver A to ground).

a. Hold the photocell assembly firmly in place and

a. Move the black wire from TPB2-6C to

tighten the

two screws.

TPB2-3C. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300).

b. Verify the adjustment as follows:

b. Move the red wire from TPB2-5B to TPB2-6C.

-Apply a small amount

of forward force on

the platen knob. The probe should stay at

4.

Loosen the photocell assembly (two screws

II

the up level when you remove your hand

behind the motor) so that the assembly will slide

from the knob.

but not move by itself.

-Apply a small amount

of backward force on

the platen knob. The probe should stay at a

down level when you remove your hand from

the knob.

c. Readjust if necessary.

d. Power down.

e. Move the red wire from TPB2-6C back to

TPB2-5B. Refer to the 5103 MIM (300).

f. Move the black wire from TPB2-3C back

to

TPB2-6C.

,/

TPB

0

/

TPAO

Right End

VieVli

3-108

11.

Remove the probe and jumper wire. Reinstall the

(

printer adapter card on machines that required

removal.

12.

Reinstall the printer cover and forms tractor unit.

13. Check the adjustment by running MOl 800;

readjust

if necessary.

(

Note:

If adjusted incorrectly, the forms motor might run

backwards.

(

Manual

Entry Programming

Method

This technique is similar to the 5110 MOl 0800 emitter

adjustment routine and may

be used on both the 5100

and the 5110 computer systems. Initial

set-up for the

adjustment should include the installation

of the tractor

assembly and the insertion and engagement

of paper

under the platen

with platen rolls engaged.

Initial entries on the 5100 computer system are:

1. Load OCP1 normal mode (See DCP 1

Normal Mode

in this section.)

2.

Alter read/write storage locations 3F70 through

3FFF by entering the data given in the data table

that follows.

3. Press the spacebar after all characters have been

entered.

4. Enter:

BR 3F70.

5. Press the EXECUTE key.

Refer to the following material on Test Description in

this section.

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-109

DATA TABLE

Read/Write Storage

Location

Data

,

3F70 8541 8645 8700 A005 858B 868A 8740 840C

3F80 8000 0204 15EO OF54 OB01 0500 C003 AOO5

3F90 1560 OF64 FBFF

05AE

OC01 1500 1590

0904

3FAO 05EE COOB OE47 OE45 D101 1593 01E6 5108

3FBO 159F

8804

CE45 CE4E 0847 0807 01A4 01E7

3FCO C185 AOO7 7FBO OAE4 CMOC A011 FCOO 01CC

3FOO

01C6

C103 0094

OF74 7FBO CB04 F005 1510

3FEO DC01

8000

FCOO 01CC 01C6

C103

F009 OD47

3FFO 0024

0000 0000 0000

0000

0000 0000

0000

Test

Description:

When the program has begun to

execute, the 5103 platen should be rotating back and

forth. The accuracy

of the emitter adjustment is

displayed with a series

of arrows. If there are no binds

in the carriage and the emitter is

in adjustment,

approximately 1 and

1/3 lines of arrows should be

pointing up, and 1 and 1/3 lines of arrows should be

point down.

If the lines of arrows are not with

±

three arrows of

being the same length, the forms emitter needs to be

adjusted. If the print/ plot feature is on the system using

the printer, the emitter should be adjusted

to give within

±

one arrow of the same length lines.

Loosen the forms emitter and move

it slightly in the

direction

of the greater number of arrows. The length of

the lines of arrows is an indication of the relative

freedom from binds in the platen.

The pattern of arrows shown below would require a

slight downward adjustment

of the emitter to obtain a

±

one arrow adjustment accuracy.

tttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttftttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt

ttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~+++~+++++~~+~~~+~~++++++~+~+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++~++

~~~~+~~~+~~~~~~~+~+++++~~+++~+~

3-110

(

(

Saving the Manually Entered Diagnostic Program:

The

diagnostic program may

be saved on a tape cartridge

that can be reserved

for this purpose. Do not store the

program on the diagnostic tape

or in a used file. Insert

a

scratch

tape cartridge with a file marked for at least 1 K

bytes.

, GENERAL PROBLEM SOLVING

General Procedures

General procedures to resolve intermittent and

miscellaneous problems follow:

• Whenever possible, identify the problem area (such

as forms feed, print head, ribbon feed). The

customer-reported symptom may be used

to do this,

especially

if the diagnostics run without error. If a

problem area can be identified, refer

to the

Diagnostic

Aids

section of this manual and select an MDI

pertaining to the area or problem.

• Check the mechanical parts

for loose screws, broken

springs, loose parts, binds, interference, or other

visual problems. When possible, operate the

mechanical parts manually

to find clues to the

problem.

• Ensure that all connectors, cards, wires, and jumpers

are securely plugged.

• Check all connectors, taper pins, and other terminals

for poor crimps, defective parts, excessively loose

contacts, or other noticeable problems.

• Check

for wires or cables that might be pinched or

are intermittently shorting.

• Check for broken wires that might break contact

intermittently.

• Check

for discoloring of the circuit cards that might

indicate overheating

of a component.

After any repairs or corrections, run the diagnostics to

verify proper operation.

To store locations 3F70 through 3FFF, perform the

following steps:

1. Load DCP1 diagnostic mode.

Enter: C

Hold down the CMD key and press

9.

Enter: 3F70 3FFF 0001

OO4B

0000

Press the EXECUTE key.

2.

(

3.

4.

5.

This program will write the data stored from 3F70

through

3FFF into file 0001 of the tape cartridge. A

different file may

be used but the 0001 must be

changed

to a different file number and entered in

hexadecimal

to identify the different file.

(

Loading the

Forms

Emitter

Test

Program from Tape:

Perform the following steps to load the test program

from the tape cartridge:

1. Load DCP1 diagnostic mode.

Enter: C

Hold down the CMD key and press 8 on the

numeric key pad.

Enter: 3F70 0001 0000

Press the

EXECUTE key. (The program will be

loaded form file 0001 [hex] of the tape cartridge.)

Enter:

BR 3F70

Press the EXECUTE key. (The program will begin

to execute.)

Note: The file number must be in hex.

2.

3.

4.

5.

(

-.

6.

7.

(

If a file other than file 1 was specified when the

program was stored on the tape cartridge, then you

must specify that file by using a hex number during the

~"

.. entry of the commands given above. Step 4 specifies

file 1

with the hex byte 0001. This should be changed

--/

to properly identify the file used on the tape cartridge.

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-111

General Problems and Service Hints

• If the forms are jamming, tearing, or feeding

incorrectly:

There might be incorrect clearance between the

chain guide and the cover on the forms tractor

unit. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (325).

The paper deflector might

be too close to the

platen. The deflector is held up by four prongs

(two prongs on each side); these prongs should be

formed down so the deflector rests

On the flat

springs between the pressure rolls. Refer

to the

5103

MIM (320).

The cut forms guide might not be flipped back

as

it should be (on old style machines) when yOu use

continuous forms.

The cover might not be aligned properly. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (310).

The ribbon shield might be

too close to the platen.

There should

be a minimum of 0.008 inches (0.20

mm) clearance between the ribbon shield and the

platen when the copy control dial is set at

O.

Refer to the 5103 MIM (366).

Forms might be thicker than' the allowed maximum

of 0.018 inches (0.46 mm). Refer to the

Forms

Design Reference Guide,

GA24-3488.

The forms tractor unit might not be parallel with

the platen and might

not be fully seated at all four

mounting points. Improper se8tingis usually

caused by a twisted forms tractor unit.

If the

forms tractor unit is

stiff when twisted, remove the

right side cover and loosen the

two shaft screws

1/8 to 1/4 of

a

turn.

Ensure that the forms are inserted correctly. Refer

to

BASIC Reference Guide,

SA21-9217 orAPL

Reference Guide,

SA21-9213 for the method of

inserting forms. The forms feeding might be

improved if you remove the cut forms guide and

route the forms over the printer cover rather than

over the plastic rollers.

If the forms feed fails to index correctly:

There might

be mechanical binds in the platen

gears, the idler gear, the forms motor/emitter

assembly, or the forms tractor unit. Refer to the

5103

MIM (324, 326, 327, 328, 329, or 330).

-The idler gear stud on the forms motor/emitter

assembly might be broken.

-The forms emitter assembly might be defective or

out

of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332).

The forms feed amplifier

might be defective. The

forms feed amplifier might

be located on a small

card either mounted on the fOrms

motor/emitter

assembly or mounted on the printer adapter card.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (332).

The end

of forms switch might be defective or out

of adjustment, or it might have loose wires on the

terminals. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (334).

Card A1B1 might be defective. Refer to the 5103

MIM (304).

If the form feeds continuously:

This problem usually pertains

to the 5100. The

forms feed motor in the printer will

not advance

unless

it receives drive pulses from the 5100.

Shorted or open signal lines

in the 5103 will not

cause continuous indexing.

If there are extra line spaces or the forms space or

skip

too far:

The 5103 requires 16 stepper motor pulses

to

advance one line space. If the form advances

more than one complete line space, the problem is

in the 5100.

If the form advances part of a line space, the

forms emitter might be defective or out

of

adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). There

might

be too much play in the gear train. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (327).

If the form creeps and causes variable line spacing:

There might be

too much play in the gear train.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (327).

The forms emitter might be out

of adjustment.

Refer to the 5103 MIM (332). Be sure to use the

5103 M I M at level 2 or later for the correct

adjustment.

The forms tractor unit might not be mounted

securely.

If the form runs backwards:

The forms emitter might be

out of adjustment.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (332).

I

,..-,

"'

.

./

",-j

3-112

• If the printed line is skewed or crooked:

The forms tractor unit might not

be parallel with

the platen and might not be fully seated at all four

mounting points.

a. Improper seating is usually caused by a twisted

forms tractor unit.

If the forms tractor unit is

stiff when twisted, remove the right side cover

(-

and loosen the two shaft screws 1/8 to 1/4 of

a turn.

b. There might

be interference between the

printer cover and the forms tractor unit which

does not allow the forms tractor unit

to seat

completely. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (310).

(

If the ribbon jams:

The ribbon shield might not

be installed correctly

and the ribbon might not be tracking below the

opening in the shield. Readjust the shield

to

obtain a minimum clearance of 0.007 inches (0.18

mm) between the print head and the shield at the

bottom. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (366).

Check

for proper tracking of the ribbon through

the ribbon feed rolls. Refer

to the 5103 MIM

(376). The ribbon should not be more than 0.015

inches (0.39 mm) above the feed rolls.

If the

ribbon is too far above the feed rolls, one

of the

following might be the cause:

a. The feed rolls might not be adjusted properly.

(

They should be the same height and not

cocked.

b. The print head cover might be hitting the cable

near the oil reservoir. This can cause the left

side

of the cover to rise and lift the ribbon off

the print head. If this condition exists, cut a

small piece from the cover where

it hits the

cable. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (301).

c. The ribbon box might be positioned too low.

To raise the ribbon box, loosen the

two screws

that hold the ribbon box

to the carrier (one

screw on the left side and one screw

in the

bottom

of the box). Then raise the box for

proper tracking and tighten the screws. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (301).

The ribbon might be sticking

to the feed rolls.

Remove and clean the feed rolls. Refer

to the

5103

MIM (374).

(--

Check

for metal spacers between the feed rolls

and the feed roll carrier. There should be a spacer

at both the top and the bottom of the feed roll.

Replace the feed rolls

if both spacers are not

installed. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (376).

Ensure that the print wires do

not protrude more

than 0.002 inches (0.051 mm) beyond the face

of

the print head.

Improper setting

of the copy control dial can lead

to ribbon jams. The dial should be set for a good

print quality on the last copy and no smudging on

the first copy. The numbers on the dial do not

correspond

to the number of parts in the form.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (301).

• If the printer fails to print or the print head fails to

move:

The end

of forms switch might be defective or out

of adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (334).

The print emitter

or print emitter pickup might be

defective or out of adjustment. Refer to the 5103

MIM (340 and 341).

The forms feed might not have indexed after the

last print line. Refer

to the service hints above

labeled

If

the

Forms Feed

Fails

to

Index Correctly.

The copy control dial might not be correctly set for

the thickness of the copy.

The print head

to platen clearance might be too

large. Refer to the 5103 MIM (360).

There might be a short circuit between the print

emitter and the print emitter pickup. Refer

to the

5103

MIM (302). The only place the two should

join is at the plastic pads.

• Overprinting:

Overprinting occurs

if a print emitter error is

detected while a line is being printed.

If no error

occurs and the printed data is correct and in the

proper format, check

for a print emitter or a print

emitter pickup that is defective

or out of

adjustment. Refer to the 5103 MIM (340 and

341).

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-113

• Light printing:

The copy control dial

might not be set correctly.

Refer

to the 5103 MIM (301).

The ribbon might need

to be replaced.

-The clearance between the platen and the print

head might be too large. Refer to the 5103 MIM

(360).

There

might not be enough tension on the two

print head springs. There should be 700 to 900

grams of tension at the tip of the print head near

the print wires. This measurement should be taken

with the platen removed and the print head near

the center

of the machine.

Check for mechanical binding, sticking, or

interference that would keep the print head from

moving all the

way forward toward the platen.

Especially check

to ensure that the print head

cable does not interfere.

The ribbon

might not be advancing. Check for

broken ribbon drive lines, defective drive clutches,

and misalignment

of the ribbon drive gears.

Check

to ensure that the ribbon feed roll release

knob is in the proper position. Refer

to the 5103

MIM (301).

If one end of the printed line is darker than the

other, check the

A-frame alignment. Also check

for a bent platen shaft. Refer to the 5103 MIM

(333).

3-114

If every other line prints light:

-One

of the ribbon drive lines might be broken.

Refer

to 5103 MIM (301).

-One

of the ribbon drive clutches might be

defective. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (302).

If the left margin is uneven:

-The

left margin might be set incorrectly. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (343).

Check the adjustments

of the print emitter and the

print emitter pickup. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (302,

340, and 341).

If all the print wires fire in the left margin area:

Replace the print emitter pickup. Refer

to 5103

MIM (302 and 341).

If part of the character in print position 1 is missing:

The

left margin might be set incorrectly. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (343).

-Check the adjustments

of the print emitter and

print emitter pickup. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (302,

340, and 341).

• Broken print wires:

-The following might cause breakage

of the print

wires:

a. Improper setting of the copy control dial for the

thickness

of the forms used.

b. Printing over the perforations, the feed holes, or

the edge of the forms.

c. Ribbon jams, which can cause the print wires to

catch on the ribbon and break the wires.

Ensure

that fixes or engineering changes for

ribbon jams are installed.

If the print head carrier stops when it approaches the

right side:

Ensure

that the belt clamp does not contact the

print head stepper

motor when the print head

carrier is moved

to the extreme right. Refer to the

5103

MIM (302).

If the 24 Vdc supply voltage is too high:

Replace card

AlA 1 and the transistor

Q

1.

Refer to

the 5103 MIM (303).

• If intermittent problems exist which are caused by

poor grounding:

Proper grounding is necessary

for proper operation

of the printer. Check the following list to help find

intermittent problems:

a. Ensure that the customer has provided the

proper grounding

for the 5100 (the green wire

goes

to ground).

b. Ensure that the I/O signal cables have a good

ground at the 5100.

c. Ensure that the forms tractor unit is set securely

on the printer.

d. Ensure that the wire forms rack is electrically

connected

to the printer frame. A resistance of

(

100K ohms or less between the forms rack and

the printer frame is acceptable. Refer

to the

5103

MIM (300).

e. It may be necessary to ground the forms rack

to the printer with a ground wire.

f. Check

for electrical noise generated from other

machines

in the area, or for electrically noisy

machines connected

to the same AC line as the

5100 computer.

If printing intermittently stops:

Capacitor C4 is the filter capacitor

for the +5Vdc

supply

to the printer. The printer might not

operate if this capacitor is

not in the circuit. Refer

to the 5103 MIM (303). Check for the following:

a. Capacitor C4 might be open.

b. The wire betweeen C4 and test point A 1 might

be loose or broken or might have a bad crimp.

c. The land pattern between test point A 1 and test

point V4 might be open.

d. The wire between capacitor C4 and test point

4F might be loose or broken or might have a

bad crimp.

e. The land pattern between test point 4F and test

point

G6 might be open. Refer to the 5103

MIM (386).

The circuit card A 1 A 1 contains most

of the control

circuits

forthe printer. This card may be replaced

in

an attempt to fix intermittent problems. Refer to

the 5103 MIM (303).

(

Intermittent Failures Troubleshooting Guide 3-11&

3-116

This page intentionally left blank.

INTRODUCTION 4-3

I/O Devices

4-3

The 5103 Printer

4-3

f~

The 5106 Auxiliary Tape Unit

4-3

Features

4-3

Serial

I/O Adapter Feature

4-3

Asynchronous Communications Feature 4-3

Katakana Feature .

4-4

Models

4-4

(

Functional Units

4-4

Keyboard

4-4

Display Adapter Card

4-4

Controller

4-4

Storage. 4-4

Base

I/O Card .

4-4

I/O Cable Driver

4-4

Microprogramming

4-4

INTERNAL OPERATION OF THE 5100 . 4-5

5100 Internal Operation Diagram 4-6

5100 Data Flow and Parity Checking 4-7

Keyboard and Control Panel

4-9

Switches and Controls

4-9

Lights. 4-10

Keyboard Data Flow .

4-10

Keyboard Operation

4-10

Keyboard Code Translation 4-10

(

Key Functions 4-11

Keyboard Error Checking

4-12

Microprogramming 4-12

CONTROLLER 4-15

5100 Controller Data Flow 4-15

5100 Controller Description

4-16

Storage Read Bus and Storage

Write Bus

4-16

Data Bus In 4-16

Data Bus

Out 4-16

Storage Address Bus 4-16

Internal Controller Organization

4-16

Machine Cycles 4-17

Interrupts 4-17

Error Checking .

4-18

I/O Data Flow Control 4-19

(

Read Only Storage 4-19

Read/Write Storage 4-23

Storage Data Flow 4-25

Storage Address Register 4-26

Storage

Read Bus

4-26

Storage

Write Bus

4-26

Storage Error Checking

4-26

Base

I/O Card .

4-26

(~

I/O Cable Driver Card

4-27

TAPE

4-28

Tape

Unit Overview

4-28

Tape Data Flow

4-29

Tape Operations

4-29

Tape Drive Components . 4-29

(

Tape Cartridge .

4-31

Tape

Writing and Formatting 4-32

Contents

Tracks

4-33

Files

4-33

Records.

4-34

Tape Position Markers

4-37

Tape

Motion

4-38

Forward Tape Motion 4-38

Reverse Tape

Motion

4-38

Operations

4-38

Mark

4-38

Find

4-39

Read

4-39

Write

4-39

Rewind

4-39

Backspace.

4-39

Tape Adapter .

4-40

Tape Adapter I/O Lines 4-41

Error Checking

4-44

DISPLAY.

4-45

Display Adapter .

4-45

Display Adapter Controls 4-46

TV Monitor. 4-49

POWER

4-50

AC Power Box

4-50

Power Supply

PC Board

4-51

DC Power Distribution .

4-51

Power Supply Protection

4-51

Referenced Voltage

4-51

5100 OPERATIONS 4-52

Power On Procedure, Initialization, and

Bring-up Diagnostic

4-52

I/O Operation and Data Transfer from Keyboard

to Display and Printer

4-52

Contents

4-1

发布评论

评论列表 (0)

  1. 暂无评论